Está en la página 1de 247

NOTA TÉCNICA PARA LA IMPLEMENTACIÓN DEL

SERVICIO DE REGULACIÓN SECUNDARIA DE


FRECUENCIA A TRAVÉS DEL CONTROL AUTOMÁTICO
BORRADOR

DE GENERACIÓN (AGC)

Lima, Perú
Setiembre de 2015
Actualizado a Junio 2016
Contenido
1 Introducción ............................................................................................................................................................... 3
2 Objetivos ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4
3 Abreviaturas y Definiciones .................................................................................................................................. 5
4 Modelo General de la Prestación del Servicio de Regulación Secundaria de Frecuencia ............ 8
5 Elementos de la Nota Técnica Requeridos en el PR-22........................................................................... 10
5.1 Requisitos técnicos de la infraestructura de comunicaciones entre las URS y el COES ... 10
5.2 Condiciones de Falla de Comunicaciones y Pruebas..................................................................... 12
5.3 Requisitos técnicos para la infraestructura de comunicación entre las Unidades de
Generación y las URS. 
 ............................................................................................................................................ 12
5.4 Umbrales para exigir capacidad de regulación propia a las URS (en términos de tamaño
relativo respecto del SEIN)
 .................................................................................................................................... 14
5.5 Listado de información técnica de Calificación a suministrar al COES por parte de los
generadores 
 ............................................................................................................................................................... 15
BORRADOR

5.6 Especificación de las pruebas de calificación para URS ............................................................... 16


5.7 Metodología para la asignación conjunta del PDO con la Reserva para Regulación
Secundaria. .................................................................................................................................................................. 18
5.8 Especificaciones técnicas del AGC primario y secundario, sus sistemas informáticos de
soporte y sus requisitos de mantenimiento. 
 ................................................................................................. 20
5.9 Lista de información a intercambiar entre las URS y el COES. 
 .................................................. 33
5.10 Metodología para calcular el incremento de generación que determina la respuesta
dinámica teórica de la URS en cada Ciclo de Operación. 
......................................................................... 34
5.11 Los valores de las constantes T1, ESR_MAX y UR utilizadas para el seguimiento de la
respuesta de las URS, según lo establecido en el numeral 2 del Anexo III......................................... 35

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


2
1 Introducción

La Nota Técnica para la Prestación del Servicio de AGC, se elaboró de acuerdo con lo definido en
el numeral 6.1.17 del Procedimiento Técnico N°22 “Reserva Rotante para Regulación Secundaria
de Frecuencia” (PR-22). Este procedimiento, establece los criterios y metodología para la
prestación del Servicio de Regulación Secundaria de Frecuencia.

BORRADOR

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


3
2 Objetivos
• Definir las especificaciones técnicas necesarias para el funcionamiento de la Regulación Secundaria de
Frecuencia en el SEIN, de acuerdo con lo definido en el numeral 6.1.17 del PR-22.
• Definir los parámetros técnicos que se deben tener en cuenta para el correcto funcionamiento del
sistema AGC del COES.

BORRADOR

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


4
3 Abreviaturas y Definiciones
Para la aplicación del presente documento técnico, las siguientes abreviaturas tendrán el
significado que a continuación se indica:
ACE: Error de Control de Área, por sus siglas en inglés (Área Control Error).
AGC: Control Automático de Generación, por sus siglas en inglés (Automatic Generation Control).

DRB: Déficit de Reserva a Bajar. 

DRS: Déficit de Reserva a Subir.

MRS: Modulo de Regulación Secundaria proporcionado por el COES
PDO: Programa Diario de Operaciones.

RM: Regulador Maestro.

RS: Regulación Secundaria.

RAB: Reserva Asignada a Bajar.

RAS: Reserva Asignada a Subir.

RCB: Reserva en Control a Bajar.

BORRADOR

RCS: Reserva en Control a Subir.



RSF: Regulación Secundaria de Frecuencia.

RRB: Reserva Regulante (grupos) / Reconocida (URS) a Bajar.
RRS: Reserva Regulante (grupos) / Reconocida (URS) a Subir.
SRS: Superávit de Reserva a Subir.

SRB: Superávit de Reserva a Bajar.

URS: Unidad de Regulación Secundaria. 

DEFINICIONES
Error de Control de Área (ACE): Es la diferencia instantánea entre el valor actual y programado
del intercambio más los efectos de la diferencia entre el valor actual y programado de la
frecuencia.

Banda Central: Rango de frecuencia comprendida entre 60,0Hz ± Delta. Este rango es utilizado
para evaluar la calidad de la RS.
Bloque de Control (Área de Control del AGC): Conjunto de Unidades de Generación utilizados
para la Regulación Secundaria, y que son coordinados de manera centralizada por un programa
AGC. En condiciones normales del SEIN se regula como una sola área.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


5
Característica de Frecuencia (Bias): Variación de la frecuencia con el incremento de potencia
en el sistema, debido a la propia naturaleza de la demanda y a la acción de la Regulación
Primaria de Frecuencia.
Ciclo de Operación: Intervalo de tiempo en que se calcula el requerimiento de Regulación
Secundaria para todo el SEIN por el AGC.
Déficit de Reserva: Reserva rotante para Regulación Secundaria que una URS no proporciona y
que debería haber proporcionado según la asignación que le correspondió en el despacho de
Reserva para Regulación Secundaria. Se compone de un Déficit de Reserva a Subir, y un Déficit
de Reserva a Bajar.
Delta: Desvío de frecuencia admisible en el SEIN en operación normal, cuyo valor es
determinado anualmente por el COES.
Delta máxima: Desvío de frecuencia máxima admisible en el SEIN ante una gran perturbación,
cuyo valor es determinado anualmente por el COES.
Calificación: Procedimiento previo que deben realizar las URS y las Unidades de Generación que
decidan participar en la prestación del Servicio Complementario de Regulación Secundaria.
Resultado de aplicar el procedimiento técnico del COES de prueba de las URS que presenten
exitosamente las pruebas requeridas.
Potencia mínima de la URS para participar en AGC: Es la suma de potencias de las Unidades
de Generación (UG) que lo conforman, potencia que debe ser igual o mayor al 10% de la reserva
de regulación secundaria total del sistema.
BORRADOR

Regulación Secundaria: Servicio complementario cuyo objetivo es mantener la frecuencia del


SEIN en su valor de referencia y, eventualmente y de manera simultánea mantener la potencia
neta por las interconexiones internacionales según su programa.
Regulador Maestro: Programa AGC controlado por el COES que permite realizar la Regulación
Secundaria de manera automática a nivel de todo el SEIN o por sistemas aislados
temporalmente.
Reserva para Regulación Secundaria: Reserva rotante disponible y operativa en SEIN útil para
Regulación Secundaria y calculada como la suma de las Reservas en Control de las URS
operativas en el SEIN. Se compone de una Reserva a Subir, y una Reserva a Bajar.
Reserva Asignada: Reserva para Regulación Secundaria asignada a una Unidad de Generación
mediante el procedimiento de asignación de Reserva para Regulación Secundaria.
Reserva Asignada a la URS: Suma de las Reservas Asignadas a las Unidades de Generación
pertenecientes a esa URS. Se compone de una Reserva Asignada a Subir, y una Reserva Asignada
a Bajar.
Reserva de Regulación Secundaria mínima por unidad para participar en AGC: Se define
como la reserva mínima para regulación secundaria de frecuencia que cada UG puede disponer
para prestar el servicio de AGC y corresponde a la diferencia entre la capacidad máxima y la
capacidad mínima de la unidad, que haya sido declarada y verificada durante las pruebas de
integración de las URS y UG.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


6
Reserva en Control: Reserva rotante disponible en una URS y útil para Regulación Secundaria,
calculada como la suma de las Reservas Regulantes de las Unidades de Generación de la URS
que se encuentran en control. Se compone de una Reserva en Control a Subir y una Reserva en
Control a Bajar.
Reserva Reconocida: Parte de la Reserva en Control de una URS que el COES considera útil para
Regulación Secundaria en el SEIN.
Reserva Regulante: Reserva útil disponible en una Unidad de Generación para Regulación
Secundaria.
Superávit de Reserva: Reserva para Regulación Secundaria que una URS proporciona
adicionalmente a su Reserva Asignada, y que el COES reconoce.
Tiempo de Retardo de la URS o UG: es el período de tiempo que se mide desde que el AGC
del COES envíe el mando de regulación hasta que el sistema SCADA registre que la unidad
responde efectivamente.
Unidad de Generación (UG): Unidades de generación que hacen parte de una URS calificada
para efectos de prestar el Servicio Complementario de Regulación Secundaria.
Unidad de Regulación Secundaria (URS): Conjunto de Unidades de Generación que prestan
conjuntamente el servicio de Regulación Secundaria. La URS puede prestar el servicio con
unidades individuales o en conjunto según el tipo de control o las condiciones técnicas de la
planta.
Sintonía de una URS en el AGC: Es el proceso que se realiza para la integración de URS al AGC
BORRADOR

del COES o ante cambios en una unidad de generación que puedan originar una modificación de
la respuesta en regulación primaria de la unidad ante una variación de la frecuencia o una
modificación en el tiempo de retardo que hay entre el comando enviado por el AGC y la
respuesta real de la unidad. En el proceso de sintonía se determina el ajuste de los parámetros
del modelo de la unidad en el sistema SCADA del COES.

Integración de una URS al AGC: Procedimiento mediante el cual una URS, es calificada para la
prestación del servicio de RS, después de solicitar, voluntariamente, su calificación al COES y
cumplir con los requisitos establecidos en el numeral 7.2 del Procedimiento Técnico PR – 22 y
presentar con resultado satisfactorio las pruebas para cada una de las Unidades de Generación
que integran la URS, detalladas en el numeral 7.6 del mencionado Procedimiento.

Velocidad de Rampa de una UG: corresponde a velocidad de toma de carga de subida o de


bajada de una UG.

Velocidad de Rampa de una URS con control conjunto de planta: corresponde a la velocidad
de carga de subida o de bajada del conjunto de UGs de la URS.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


7
4 Modelo General de la Prestación del Servicio de Regulación
Secundaria de Frecuencia
Para la prestación del servicio de regulación secundaria de frecuencia por parte de las URS y UG
bajo control del AGC del COES, se ilustran en la Figura 1 los diferentes casos que se pueden
configurar en el SEIN.

CCO CCO-R
Nivel 1 - Nacional

RIS (ICCP)

ICCP
Nivel 2 - Agentes

CC
Generación IEC104 /
DNP3.0i PDC
IEC104 /
DNP3.0i

IEEE C37-118
Nivel 3 – Planta /
Subestación

BORRADOR

fmed
URS/MRS URS/MRS fmed
CASO 1 CASO 2 Pmed
CASO 3

~ ... ~ ~ ... ~ ~ ~ ~
Nivel 4 - Unidad

RTU PMU

UG UG UG UG UG UG UG

1 ... 5 ...
1 5 Posible isla Posible isla

UNIDADES DE AGC EQUIPOS SUBESTACION CRITICAS

Figura 1. Implementación del Control de las Unidades

Caso 1: URS que utilicen el Modulo de Regulación Secundaria (MRS)


En este caso las unidades de generación (UG) serán controladas por el AGC utilizando el MRS
que utiliza protocolos de comunicación IEC60870-5-104 o DNP3.0i, con canales de comunicación
dedicados. En este caso se consideran que todas las UG son de una sola planta y por lo tanto la
URS siempre tendrá todas sus unidades en la misma isla eléctrica. Por otra parte se debe
considerar que la MRS controla individualmente las unidades que están bajo su control y por lo
tanto no distribuye una orden global entre las unidades sino que recibe órdenes individuales
para cada unidad y las implementa. Como consecuencia de lo anterior se define lo siguiente:
• Modelo de las UG de la URS: modelo independiente de cada unidad en el AGC y su respuesta es
monitoreada en tiempo real en forma individual.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


8
• Integración, sintonía y pruebas: se realizan individualmente para cada unidad utilizando la MRS.

Caso 2: URS que utilicen el MRS como medio primario y su centro de control como secundario
Este caso es similar al caso 1 para el modo primario pero utilizan como medio alterno de control
de las UG su sistema de control actual que está en comunicación en el COES por medio de ICCP.
El sistema de control del generador puede ser de planta o de todo un conjunto de plantas. Para
ese caso el ICCP debe implementar, además de los bloques 1 y 2, el bloque 5 para recibir los
mandos de control. Tener en cuenta que en este caso el control actual de planta debe implantar
el control individual para las unidades que estén bajo su mando y no un control conjunto de
éstas.
Como consecuencia de lo anterior se define lo siguiente:
• Modelo de las UG de URS: modelo independiente de cada unidad en el AGC y su respuesta es
monitoreada en tiempo real en forma individual.
• Integración, sintonía y pruebas: se realizan individualmente para cada unidad utilizando el MRS o
el centro de control del generador.

Caso 3: URS que utilicen el control de planta actual únicamente


BORRADOR

En este caso el agente generador utiliza su propia infraestructura de control para implementar
las órdenes recibidas desde el AGC que pueden ser para el control individual de las unidades de
la URS (Caso 3A) o que implementen un control conjunto de estas unidades (Caso 3B). En el caso
3 se configura la posibilidad que dependiendo de la topología del sistema eléctrico algunas
unidades de la URS puedan quedar en islas diferentes, caso en el cual el AGC debe asociar la
URS a las UG que tengan mayor cantidad de generación.
Como consecuencia de lo anterior se define lo siguiente para el Caso 3A:
• Modelo de las UG de URS: modelo independiente de cada unidad en el AGC y su respuesta es
monitoreada en tiempo real en forma individual.
• Integración, sintonía y pruebas: se realizan individualmente para cada unidad utilizando el control
de planta.

Como consecuencia de lo anterior se define lo siguiente para el Caso 3B:


• Modelo de las UG de URS: modelo del conjunto de unidades en el AGC según las unidades que
estén en línea en un momento dado. Cada posible conjunto que pueda participar en regulación
secundaria se debe identificar y modelar en el AGC para hacer posible que su respuesta sea
monitoreada en tiempo real. La URS debe enviar al AGC las señales que le permitan al AGC
determinar cuál modelo debe utilizar entre los diferentes modelos disponibles para la planta.
• Integración, sintonía y pruebas: se realizan para cada conjunto de unidades que puedan operar
para regulación secundaria.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


9
En la Figura 1 también se ilustra la toma de datos tanto de frecuencia como de potencia de
intercambios en puntos del sistema. Para estos casos se prevé la toma de señales por parte del
COES de acuerdo con esta norma técnica utilizando protocolos IEC870-5-104, DNP3.0i o
IEEE37.118 según el tipo de dispositivo que se tenga disponible y la señal a ser medidas.
La Figura 2 ilustra la relación entre el SCADA y el AGC y se incluye aquí para ilustrar aspectos que
se desarrollan en la nota técnica.

BORRADOR

Figura 2. Relación entre el SCADA y el AGC

5 Elementos de la Nota Técnica Requeridos en el PR-22


5.1 Requisitos técnicos de la infraestructura de comunicaciones entre
las URS y el COES
5.1.1 Características de los Sistemas de Comunicaciones
De acuerdo con las definiciones de la Norma "Estándares Técnicos Mínimos del Sistema para la
Coordinación de la Operación en Tiempo Real del SEIN”, la red de transmisión de datos asociada

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


10
a la estructura jerárquica de control deberá ser “redundante, a prueba de fallo simple, utilizando
medios físicos independientes para comunicación con el CCO y con el CCO-R. La disponibilidad
de canal deberá ser igual o superior a 99.9 % (con redundancia).
La mencionada norma impone los siguientes requisitos para los enlaces con centros de control
de los agentes generadores que se utilicen para el control de las UG de una URS: “Para los
enlaces ICCP se tendrá un ancho de banda mínimo de 64 kbps. Los agentes suministraran los
medios de comunicación con la redundancia indicada y disponibilidad señalada, para
intercambiar información tanto con el sistema de control principal como con el sistema de
control de respaldo. No podrán hacer uso de internet como medio de envío, ni total, ni
parcialmente”. Para implementar el control de AGC utilizando ICCP se requieren los siguientes
bloques de este protocolo: bloques 1 y 2 para el intercambio de datos y el bloque 5 para la
transmisión de controles desde el AGC del COES hasta el sistema de control de la URS.
Adicionalmente la norma mencionada indica en caso que el agente generador utilice una unidad
MRS o terminal remota de su propiedad para el control directo de las unidades, “los enlaces
IEC60870-5-104 o DNP3.0i se deben implementar con un ancho de banda igual o superior a
9.6kbps para garantizar los tiempos de respuesta del AGC y se transportaran sobre una red
basada en el protocolo TCP/IP/ETHERNET. Los agentes suministraran los medios de
comunicación con la redundancia indicada y disponibilidad señalada, para intercambiar
información tanto con el sistema de control principal como con el sistema de control de
respaldo. No podrán hacer uso de internet como medio de envío, ni total, ni parcialmente”.

BORRADOR

5.1.2 Comunicaciones para Mediciones de Frecuencia y Potencia de Intercambios


De acuerdo con el procedimiento PR-22 es responsabilidad del COES implementar las
mediciones de frecuencia y de potencia de intercambios para la correcta operación del AGC.
Para lograr este objetivo el COES implementa las medidas de frecuencia utilizando equipos
instalados en el CCO y en el CCO-R y en sitios remotos seleccionados para garantizar en lo
posible por lo menos una medida de frecuencia en cada una de las áreas de control que puedan
operar en isla (mínimo 5).
Las medidas locales se tomarán utilizando los equipos de medición de tiempo y frecuencia del
sistema de control, ubicados en el CCO y en el CCO-R. Estos equipos se comunicarán
directamente por la red LAN con el sistema SCADA/AGC. La frecuencia se tomará con muestras
de por lo menos 1 cada segundo.
Las medidas remotas se pueden tomar utilizando unidades de medición fasorial (PMU) o relés
que operen como tales o transductores de alta precisión. Para medición de frecuencia se
implementará como mínimo un canal de comunicaciones hacia el CCO y otro canal hacia el
CCO-R por medios independientes. La información se podrá enviar utilizando protocolos
IEC60870-5-104 o DNP3.0i o ICCP o el protocolo IEEE C37.118 en caso de usar PMUs.
Las mediciones remotas de frecuencia se tomarán en muestras de por lo menos una cada
segundo las cuales se deben recibir en el COES al menos cada ciclo de AGC.
Las mediciones de potencia de intercambio se implementarán utilizando equipos de alta
precisión en las subestaciones de interconexión las cuales se enviarán al CCO y al CCO-R

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


11
utilizando canales independientes y protocolos de comunicación IEC60870-5-104 o DNP3.0i o
ICCP. En estos sitios se tomarán muestras de por lo menos una cada segundo las cuales se
deben recibir en el COES al menos cada ciclo de AGC.

5.2 Condiciones de Falla de Comunicaciones y Pruebas


Si durante la operación en Tiempo Real del SEIN se registran problemas con el desempeño del
AGC, el COES debe verificar si la causa de estos problemas está asociada con el desempeño del
canal de comunicación, el sistema de control propio de la URS o de la función de control del
AGC.
Si existe evidencia de problemas en el canal de comunicación o si se tiene información de que se
hayan presentado cambios en este canal o en su tecnología asociada, el COES podrá solicitar y
coordinar con los agentes generadores la realización de pruebas que permitan verificar el
desempeño de dicho canal en la prestación del servicio de regulación secundaria de frecuencia.
Para tal efecto el COES solicitará y coordinará con el agente generador la realización de pruebas
en alguno o algunos de los períodos horarios del día siguiente.
Las pruebas deben coordinarse, identificando en cuántos periodos del despacho se van a
efectuar, los rangos de reserva en qué se van a desarrollar y ajustar las mismas a los plazos
establecidos para ser programadas dentro de PDO.
El COES verificará previamente que con la realización de la pruebas no se ponga en riesgo la
seguridad de la operación del SEIN.
BORRADOR

De requerirse realizar variaciones en la generación de las unidades o plantas durante las pruebas,
el COES procurará que los cambios de generación hacia arriba y hacia abajo se realicen en torno
del despacho previsto en el PDO o Reprograma.

5.3 Requisitos técnicos para la infraestructura de comunicación entre


las Unidades de Generación y las URS. 

Para definir los requisitos técnicos para la infraestructura de comunicaciones entre las unidades
de generación y la URS se consideran únicamente los casos 1 y 2 presentados en la introducción
y que corresponden a la URS que utilicen una MRS proporcionada por el COES. Para los casos
que utilicen el control existente de las UG de la URS por medio del control existente en la planta
no se requieren requisitos técnicos diferentes a los implementados por cada agente generador y
que posibilitan el control de las UG de la URS desde su sistema de control puesto que se
sobreentiende que el agente utiliza normalmente estos medios para controlar las unidades de la
URS.
5.3.1 Arquitectura de regulación secundaria con base en la MRS
La figura 3 ilustra la arquitectura que se implementa para el control de las UG de la URS. En este
caso se ilustra una comunicación con base en el protocolo serial Modbus a modo de ejemplo.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


12
COES - AGC

UNIDAD 1
TABLERO MRS

IEC 60870-5-104
HMI SICAM 230
Regulador de
Veocidad
RTU TM 1703 Periféricos (1)

Ax1703
Ax1703
UNIDAD 2
DI DI DI AI AI AI DO DO
A
Periféricos

SICAM P
DO AO AO AO Regulador de
Veocidad
(1)

SICAM P
UNIDAD 3

SICAM P
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104

MODBUS Regulador de
Veocidad
SWITCH -B200 (1)

RS900

Figura 3. Arquitectura con base a una MRS

La Figura 4 ilustra una arquitectura alternativa que se implementa para el control de las UG de la
URS. En este caso se utiliza una comunicación con base en el protocolo IEC60870-5-104 con una
red Ethernet y por lo tanto la comunicación se realiza entre los reguladores de velocidad y la
RTU pero a través del switch correspondiente. Funcionalmente ambas arquitecturas son
equivalentes.
COES - AGC

BORRADOR

UNIDAD 1
TABLERO MRS
IEC 60870-5-104

HMI SICAM 230


Regulador de
Veocidad
RTU TM 1703 Periféricos (1)

Ax1703
Ax1703
UNIDAD 2
DI DI DI AI AI AI DO DO
A
Periféricos

SICAM P
DO AO AO AO Regulador de
Veocidad
(1)

SICAM P
UNIDAD 3

SICAM P
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104
Regulador de
Veocidad
SWITCH -B200 (1)

RS900

Figura 4. Arquitectura alternativa para el control de las UG de la URS

5.3.2 Características del MRS


Los MRS tienen como principales características:
• El elemento principal del MRS está basado en una RTU como unidad de procesamiento y
comunicación para la regulación secundaria.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


13
• La interfaz gráfica local – HMI del MRS está basada en una pantalla táctil touch screen de 12’’
desde la cual estará́disponible la visualización y ajuste de potencias para la regulación secundaria.
• El MRS cuenta con módulos I/O e interfaces de comunicación eléctrica (protocolos estándares)
para la interoperabilidad con los elementos asociadas a la unidad de generación y que estén
involucradas en la regulación secundaria de los mismos.
• El MRS está diseñado para realizar la función de regulación secundaria en 3 UG por planta de
generación expandible a 6 UG.

Un MRS comprende los siguientes módulos I/O e interfaces disponibles:


• 3 módulos, cada uno con 16 entradas digitales (DI) con precisión de 1ms, 110/220 VDC.
• 3 módulos, cada uno con 08 salidas digitales (DO) tipo relé́, 24-220 VDC / 230 VAC.
• 3 módulos, cada uno con 04 entradas analógicas (AI), ± 20mA / ± 10V.
• 3 módulos, cada uno con 04 Salidas analógicas (AO), ± 20mA / ± 10 mA ± 10 V.
• 1 interfaz Ethernet en protocolo IEC 60870-5-104, mandatorio para comunicación con el AGC. El
MRS cuenta con interfaz en IEC 60870-5-104 para la comunicación con el AGC y la IHM local.
• 1 interfaz Ethernet en protocolo IEC 60870-5-104, para integración de los reguladores de
velocidad de cada unidad de generación del MRS cuando se utilice este protocolo.
• 1 interfaz serial en protocolo Modbus, para integración de los reguladores de velocidad de cada
unidad de generación del MRS cuando se utilice el protocolo serial.
• Medidores de energía para variables eléctricas.
o 3 medidores SICAM P55 con 03 entradas de corriente y 03 entradas de tensión para el
BORRADOR

registro de los valores eléctricos de las unidades de generación.

Alternativamente al uso de los medidores suministrados para el envío de señales de


corriente y tensión al MRS se pueden enviar dichas las señales mediante lazos de
corriente de 4–20 mA., teniendo en cuenta la cantidad de entradas y módulos del
MRS.

5.4 Umbrales para exigir capacidad de regulación propia a las URS (en
términos de tamaño relativo respecto del SEIN)

El objetivo de este parámetro es definir el valor a partir del cual una URS debe tener capacidad
de regulación propia, con el fin de garantizar al SEIN que ante contingencias en las cuales no se
pueda tener el control de frecuencia centralizado desde el COES, se cuente con la posibilidad de
asignar la regulación secundaria de frecuencia a una URS que tenga la capacidad suficiente para
realizarla, y así dar confiabilidad a la prestación de este servicio.
Ante las condiciones descritas, las URS que cumplan la expresión siguiente deberán tener
Capacidad de Regulación Secundaria de Frecuencia Propia:

Min (45 MW, 50% Reserva de Regulación Secundaria del SEIN)

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


14
5.5 Listado de información técnica de Calificación a suministrar al
COES por parte de los generadores 

El siguiente listado de información técnica y de requisitos mínimos que definen las características
requeridas de las URS/UG deberá ser tenido en cuenta y suministrado al COES por todos los
agentes generadores que deseen prestar el servicio de regulación secundaria de frecuencia:
Las URS deben disponer de al menos una (1) Unidad de Generación (UG) que cumpla los
requisitos especificados para la calificación de las Unidades de Generación (7.2.1 dela PR22).
Contar con un enlace en tiempo real con el Centro de Control del COES que cumpla lo
especificado en el numeral 5.1.1 de este documento.
Reserva para regulación secundaria de frecuencia para AGC por UG: La Reserva mínima que
deberá declarar por UG para ser calificada para la prestación del servicio de regulación
secundaria debe ser igual o mayor a 12 MW de los cuales 6 MW para subir y 6MW para bajar
de acuerdo con lo mostrado en la figura 5.

BORRADOR

Figura 5. Reserva Mínima por Unidad para regulación secundaria bajo AGC

La potencia mínima de la URS para participar en AGC, es la suma de potencias de las Unidades
de Generación (UG) que lo conforman, potencia que debe ser igual o mayor al 10% de la
reserva de regulación secundaria total del sistema.
Banda Muerta por cada UG: Debe ser ajustada cumpliendo con lo establecido en el Procedimiento
técnico PR – 211.
Estatismo de cada UG: Debe ser ajustado cumpliendo con lo establecido en el Procedimiento
técnico PR – 212.
Velocidad Mínima de Rampa de subida y bajada de carga por Unidad de generación (UG): Debe
ser mayor o igual a 8 MW/min.

1
El presente Ítem queda sin efecto por la comunicación COES/D-312-2016, de fecha 21 de marzo de 2016,
la misma que absuelve las consultas planteadas por las Empresas Generadoras al Proceso de Asignación
de la Provisión Base del servicio para la RSF del SEIN.
2
El presente Ítem queda sin efecto por la comunicación COES/D-312-2016, de fecha 21 de marzo de 2016,
la misma que absuelve las consultas planteadas por las Empresas Generadoras al Proceso de Asignación
de la Provisión Base del servicio para la RSF del SEIN.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


15
Velocidad Mínima de Rampa de subida y bajada de carga de una URS con control conjunto de
planta (por ejemplo ciclos combinados): Debe ser mayor o igual a 16 MW/min.
Reserva de regulación secundaria de frecuencia para AGC por URS: La Reserva mínima que
deberá declarar por URS para ser calificada para la prestación del servicio de regulación
secundaria debe ser igual o mayor al 10% de la Reserva total para regulación secundaria del
SEIN.
Tiempo de Retardo de la URS o UG en comenzar a responder una vez enviado el mando por el
AGC: Para garantizar un adecuado desempeño de la respuesta de las unidades a los mandos del
AGC, es necesario definir un límite al tiempo de retardo máximo desde el momento en que se
envíe el mando de regulación desde el AGC del COES hasta que el sistema SCADA registre que
la unidad que presta el servicio de AGC responde efectivamente. En la Figura 6 se muestran los
retardos de tiempo incluidos en el proceso de regulación de frecuencia. Los tiempos t1 y t2 son
los retardos asociados a los canales de comunicación y el tiempo t3 es el retardo asociado a la
unidad Módulo de Regulación Secundaria (MRS) o al sistema de control de la URS según el tipo
de interface que se utilice, al sistema de control de velocidad y al generador. El Máximo tiempo
de respuesta aceptable para una unidad participante en AGC es de 20 segundos.

BORRADOR

Figura 6. Tiempo de Retardo máximo de Respuesta a Mandos de AGC

5.6 Especificación de las pruebas de calificación para URS

PROCEDIMIENTO REQUERIMIENTO RESULTADO ESPERADO


Verificar que el rango de El Rango de Regulación por Rango de regulación en MW

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


16
PROCEDIMIENTO REQUERIMIENTO RESULTADO ESPERADO
regulación de la unidad Unidad de generación debe ser cumple con lo requerido
cumple con lo requerido. mayor a 6 MW.
El rango de regulación por URS
Verificar que el rango de
debe ser mayor a 10% de la Rango de regulación en MW
regulación por URS cumple
Reserva de Regulación Secundaria cumple con lo requerido
con lo requerido.
en MW.
La respuesta de las UG debe ser
Verificar linealidad de la Respuesta lineal en el rango de
lineal en el rango de regulación
respuesta de las unidades a regulación dentro de la tolerancia
con una tolerancia de variación del
los mandos enviados desde requerida.
15%.
el COES.

Determinar el tiempo de
retardo desde el envío del
Este valor debe ser menor a 20 Retardo menor que el máximo
mando de regulación desde
segundos permitido
el COES hasta que el sistema
SCADA responde
Velocidad Promedio de subir
La Velocidad de Cambio de Carga cumple con lo requerido con la
Verificar la máxima
de cada Unidad debe ser mayor o tolerancia especificada.
Velocidad de Cambio de
igual a 8 MW/min con una Velocidad Promedio de bajar
Carga de cada Unidad
tolerancia del 15 % BORRADOR
cumple con lo requerido con la
tolerancia especificada.

La Velocidad de Cambio de Carga Velocidad Promedio de subir


Verificar la máxima
por URS con control conjunto de cumple con lo requerido con la
Velocidad de Cambio de
planta (por ejemplo ciclos tolerancia especificada.
Carga por URS con control
combinados) debe ser mayor o Velocidad Promedio de bajar
conjunto de planta ( por
igual a 16 MW/min con una cumple con lo requerido con la
ejemplo ciclos combinados)
tolerancia del 15 % tolerancia especificada.
La UG en modo de control
Verificar la respuesta de la La UG o planta permanece en
automático no debe presentar
unidad o planta bajo AGC en modo de control automático sin
oscilaciones no amortiguadas o
modo automático durante presentar oscilaciones no
desviaciones sostenidas que lleven
un período minimo de 10 amortiguadas durante el período
a que la unidad sea suspendida por
minutos. de prueba.
el AGC.
Las UG o plantas probadas
simultáneamente en modo de
El conjunto de UG probadas
Pruebas en modo control automático no deben
permanece en modo de control
automático de varias presentar oscilaciones no
automático sin presentar
unidades compartiendo MRS amortiguadas o desviaciones
oscilaciones no amortiguadas
o sistemas de control. sostenidas que lleven a que una o
durante el período de prueba.
más unidades sean suspendidas
por el AGC.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


17
5.7 Metodología para la asignación conjunta del PDO con la Reserva
para Regulación Secundaria.

1. La formulación que se detalla considera que el proceso de asignación de la reserva para


RSF es realizada de manera conjunta con la del despacho del resto de unidades de
generación del sistema, considerando que los valores de reserva hacia arriba pueden ser
diferentes de los asignados hacia abajo.
2. Como premisa se considera que la reserva para RSF a ser determinada por el modelo con
la metodología que se describe solo será la correspondiente al Mercado de Ajuste en
caso se necesite dado que la Reserva para RSF adjudicada en la Provisión Base ingresa de
manera obligada (su despacho no es una variable de decisión)3.

3. Como parte de la optimización conjunta energía y reserva, en el despacho económico se


incluirán las siguientes restricciones a nivel de sistema o área para cada período t.

4. Términos adicionales a la Función Objetivo del modelo de Optimización de Corto Plazo.

I up U down

∑ RSUp i, t * PUpofert i, t + ∑ RSDn u, t * PDnofert u, t


i∈ RS u∈RS

Donde: BORRADOR

Precio de la oferta por el servicio de RSF hacia arriba de la unidad de generación


PUpofert i, t
i para el período de optimización t.

Precio de la oferta por el servicio de RSF hacia abajo de la unidad de generación


PDnpofert u, t
u para el período de optimización t.

Variable de decisión que determina el nivel de reserva secundaria hacia arriba


RSUp i, t
atendida por la unidad de generación i para el período de optimización t.

Variable de decisión que determina el nivel de reserva para RSF hacia abajo
RSDn u, t
atendida por la unidad de generación u para el período de optimización t.

5. Restricciones de margen de reserva hacia arriba (UP)

Generacion i, t + RSUp i, t ≤ Disponible MW i, t por unidad de generación i período t

RSUp i, t - Up i, t * i i, t ≤ 0 Por unidad de generación i período t

3
El presente Numeral deberá ser interpretado al amparo de lo indicado en el Artículo 1° de la Resolución
de OSINERGMIN N° 141-2016-OS/CD, “Precisan que lo previsto en los numerales 9.3 y 9.5.3.a del
Procedimiento Técnico COES PR-22 Reserva Rotante para Regulación Secundaria de Frecuencia, no es
incompatible con el esquema de mínimo costo de la operación previsto en la Ley N° 28832.”

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


18
RSUp i, t - Upmn t * i i, t ≥ 0 Por unidad de generación i período t

I up

∑ RSUp i, t ≥ HUp t Reserva del sistema período t


i∈RS

Donde:

i i, t Variable binaria de decisión que indica si la unidad de generación i para el período de


optimización t está atendiendo (1) o no (0) servicio secundario de frecuencia hacia
arriba.

Up i, t Magnitud de potencia ofertada para realizar RSF hacia arriba por la unidad de
generación i para el período de optimización t.

Upmn t Magnitud de reserva secundaria hacia arriba mínima que puede ser asignada a una
unidad de generación para el período de optimización t.

HUpt Dato de la reserva para RSF requerida del sistema hacia arriba en el mercado de ajuste
para el período t.

Dato del número de unidades de generación que ofertaron el servicio secundario de


Iup frecuencia hacia arriba para el período t

i ∈ RS Conjunto de unidades de generación que ofertaron el servicio de RSF en el mercado de


ajuste.
BORRADOR

6. Restricciones de margen de reserva hacia abajo (DOWN)

Generacion u, t - RS Dn u, t − MTMW u, t * u u, t ≥0 Por unidad de generación u período t

RSDn u, t - Down u, t * i' u, t ≤ 0


Por unidad de generación u período t

RSDn u, t - Dmin u * i' u, t ≥ 0


Por unidad de generación u período t
U down

∑ RSDn u,t ≥ HDownt Reserva del sistema período t


u∈RS

Donde:

i´ u, t Variable binaria de decisión que indica si la unidad de generación u para el período


de optimización t está atendiendo (1) o no (0) servicio de RSF hacia abajo.

Down u, t Magnitud de potencia ofertada para realizar RSF hacia abajo ofertada por la unidad
de generación u para el período de optimización t.

Dmin t Magnitud de reserva para RSF hacia abajo mínima que puede ser asignada a una
unidad de generación para el período de optimización t.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


19
HDownt Dato de la reserva para RSF requerida del sistema hacia abajo en el mercado de
ajuste para el período t.

MTMW u, t Dato del mínimo técnico en MW de la unidad de generación u para el período de


optimización t.

Dato del número de unidades que ofertan el servicio de RSF hacia abajo en el
U down
mercado de ajuste para el período t.

u ∈ RS Conjunto de unidades de generación que pueden prestar el servicio de RSF hacia


abajo en el mercado de ajuste.

u u, t Variable binaria de decisión que indica si la unidad de generación u para el período


de optimización t está despachada (1) o no (0).

5.8 Especificaciones técnicas del AGC primario y secundario, sus


sistemas informáticos de soporte y sus requisitos de
mantenimiento. 

5.8.1 Generalidades del AGC
La Regulación Secundaria (RS) es un servicio que permite ajustar la generación con el objetivo de
mantener la frecuencia en el sistema en su valor de referencia y, eventualmente y de manera
simultánea, mantener la potencia neta de intercambio con otros sistemas en su valor
programado. 

BORRADOR

El servicio de RS se prestará por medio de un programa de Control Automático de Generación


(AGC), bajo control del COES, que enviará las consignas de potencia pertinentes a las URS y UG. 

El Control Automático de Generación (AGC), es un sistema de control automático que lleva la
frecuencia y los intercambios a su valor nominal luego de desviaciones en el balance carga-
generación o después de ocurrida una perturbación en el sistema y una vez haya actuado la
Regulación Primaria de frecuencia.
El Control Automático de Generación, con el soporte del SCADA, implementa las siguientes
funciones:
Recoger y filtrar la información de las Unidades de Generación integradas al AGC.
Recoger y filtrar información de frecuencia del sistema de potencia.
Recoger y filtrar información del intercambio de energía con otros sistemas.
Programar la frecuencia del sistema de potencia.
Programar los intercambios del sistema de potencia,
Calcular el Error de Control de Área (ACE).
Calcular la asignación de control (generación a ser despachada por cada URS, por planta o por
UG)
Emitir control hacia las Unidades de Regulación Secundaria (URSs)

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


20
Monitorear la respuesta de las URSs a los comandos emitidos
Monitorear la reserva de generación en cada Unidad de Regulación Secundaria participante,
Monitorear el desempeño de Control Automático.

El AGC es una función que opera con alta disponibilidad (24x7x365) y por lo tanto se
implementa con una redundancia de forma que no sea afectado su funcionamiento por una falla
simple bien sea de hardware o software. Se configura por lo tanto en un AGC primario que
opera en un servidor del Sistema de Control del COES del CCO y un AGC secundario que opera
en otro servidor diferente del CCO. Ambos servidores y esta funcionalidad están configurados en
el modo “hot-stand-by” asegurando que la conmutación en caso de falla o por orden manual del
operador sea dentro de un lapso aproximado de 10 segundos. Además de lo anterior la
funcionalidad de AGC se encuentra disponible en el sistema de control de respaldo del COES, el
CCO-R, para soportar eventos que causen la indisponibilidad total de los recursos del sistema de
control del CCO.

5.8.2 Operación Normal con AGC


Teniendo en cuenta el mallado creciente del SEIN, el tamaño del sistema eléctrico y las mejores
prácticas a nivel internacional, para la condición normal del SEIN se considera como una sola
área de control aislada hasta cuando entren en operación las interconexiones internacionales.
Con la entrada en operación de las líneas de transmisión que interconectan el Perú con los
sistemas de potencia de Ecuador, Colombia y otros, el SEIN pasará a ser un área de control
BORRADOR

interconectada.

5.8.3 Operación en Emergencia con AGC


Desde el punto de vista del control secundario de frecuencia la operación en emergencia se
considera cuando el sistema eléctrico se separa en dos o más islas eléctricas. Una isla eléctrica
para que sea considerada como tal debe cumplir la condición que tenga un balance de
generación carga en estado estacionario, que tenga al menos una UG que pueda prestar el
servicio de regulación secundaria de frecuencia y una medida de frecuencia válida.
En condición de emergencia operativa, el AGC controla, simultáneamente, todas las islas
eléctricas que integren el SEIN en ese momento, constituyendo temporalmente cada isla un área
de control aislada a la cual se aplican todos los aspectos de control definidos en esta nota
técnica.
El AGC recibe del SCADA información de la formación de islas por detección de cambio de
topología de la red que indique el asilamiento eléctrico de una porción del SEIN. De acuerdo con
la topología se identifican las URS operativas en cada isla y la(s) señal(es) de frecuencia aplicable
a cada una de ellas.
El AGC también con base en el estado reportado por las URS y de las unidades de generación
UG de cada una de ellas, identifica las URS bajo control del AGC que están en cada una de las
"islas".

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


21
El AGC se reconfigura automáticamente para controlar la generación en cada "isla" en el modo
de frecuencia constante (FF).
Para que este módulo funcione adecuadamente se deben tener las siguientes consideraciones:
Todas las Unidades de Generación asociadas a una URS deberán estar en una misma área de
control. Si esto no es posible, las UGs que se encuentren fuera del área de control deberán
desasociarse de la URS para su operación bajo AGC.
Las señales de frecuencia e intercambios del SEIN serán priorizadas por el COES para el AGC
teniendo en cuenta: el sitio eléctrico donde está ubicada la señal teniendo mayor prioridad
subestaciones con mayores niveles de tensión, mejor calidad del equipo de medición y mejor
calidad de las comunicaciones asociadas con cada señal.
Las señales de frecuencia se ubicarán de forma tal que posibles islas operativas que se hayan
históricamente formado o que se pudieran formar bajo contingencias tipo N-1 o N-2 del sistema
eléctrico de transmisión cuenten con la medición de frecuencia.
El AGC utilizará la señal de frecuencia de más alta prioridad disponible en un momento dado y en
el orden de prioridad de estas ante fallas de la señal de frecuencia asociada a un área de control.
Es recomendable que las URS y UG que puedan prestar el servicio de regulación de frecuencia,
envían al COES la señal de frecuencia local, con el fin de garantizar las dos condiciones definidas
para el funcionamiento del AGC en islas, es decir, que se tenga al menos una UG que pueda
prestar el servicio de regulación secundaria y una medida de frecuencia válida.

5.8.4 Operación del SEIN sin Servicio de AGC BORRADOR

Para la operación normal del SEIN en el caso de falla total del AGC (falla del AGC primario y
secundario del CCO y falla del AGC del CCO-R) se configura el caso para que una URS calificada,
previamente seleccionada, a la vez controle la frecuencia del sistema con sus UG asociadas. La
URS seleccionada debe cumplir con los criterios que la califiquen para la prestación del servicio
de regulación secundaria.
Las siguientes condiciones se aplican en este caso:
1. El COES seleccionará entre las URS calificadas y con capacidad de regulación propia según el
numeral 5.4, de acuerdo con las condiciones técnicas y económicas aplicables en ese
momento, la más apropiada para prestar el servicio de regulación secundaria en forma
transitoria.
2. El resto de URS que estaban prestando el servicio de AGC en el momento de falla del mismo,
pasarán a operar en modo de control local manual sin controlar la frecuencia. Sin embargo,
deben estar prontas a retornar a operar bajo AGC del COES en cualquier momento.

5.8.5 AGC Primario y Secundario


El AGC es una función critica que debe operar continuamente (7x24x365) y por lo tanto tiene
una alta disponibilidad, igual o superior a 99.95%, en modo primario (operando en tiempo real) y
configurado en forma idéntica en modo secundario (operando en paralelo en modo de respaldo
de conmutación en caliente - hot-stand-by).

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


22
El AGC de tiempo real opera en el sistema de computación que en un momento dado actúa
como sistema primario en el CCO del COES. En caso de falla del AGC primario o a solicitud del
operador del COES entra en operación el AGC secundario, que consiste del AGC de respaldo del
CCO, que estará configurado para entrar de manera inmediata en cualquier momento. 

Adicionalmente se dispone de un AGC adicional en el centro de control de respaldo del COES
(CCO-R) configurado en forma idéntica a los AGC primario y secundario que entrará a operar en
caso de falla total del CCO.

5.8.6 Aspectos aplicables a un área de control


En la figura 7 se ilustra el esquema de control corresponde al procesamiento de las señales
primarias de entrada al AGC y al cálculo de la generación deseada del sistema la cual determina
la generación requerida de cada unidad bajo AGC. En el procedimiento se destacan para la
cálculo del ACE el filtrado de los componentes que intervienen en su cálculo en este caso la
frecuencia y luego el filtrado del ACE por medio de una lógica anticipatoria.

Frecuencia de
Referencia (f0) Señal de Estabilización
+ - de Área
+ Bias del Referencia de Generación
Frecuencia Filtro - Total de la Unidad
Sistema
Medida (fmed ) Frecuencia
(KBC ) -

Lógica de +
Anticipación
+
Error de + ACE BORRADOR

k1
tiempo
+ + -
+
Controlador Generación
Potencia + PI Total Deseada
+
Medida (Pmed ) -
-
Potencia +
Programada (Pprog) Ayuda Total
+ de Unidad
+
-
Corrección
por Energía

Generación
Directa

Figura 7. Diagrama de Bloques de la Función AGC

5.8.6.1 Filtro de Frecuencia

La frecuencia sufre de variaciones rápida frecuentes que son normales debidas a variaciones
tanto de carga como eventos de generación. El Filtro de Frecuencia tiene como función, eliminar
las variaciones rápidas existentes en la señal de frecuencia de forma a disponer de una señal más
sostenida de entrada al controlador.
El componente del error de control de área (ACE) dependiente de la frecuencia es sometido a un
proceso de filtrado. Su principal objetivo es la eliminación de componentes de alta frecuencia en
la frecuencia medida, de tal forma que el AGC no responda ante las pequeñas variaciones
rápidas de carga mencionadas. Visto en forma simple se trata de un filtro pasa bajos. En la
práctica, se incorporan filtros con el fin de evitar cambios de consignas innecesarios que

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


23
perjudiquen a las unidades generadoras, llevar el ACE aun valor en promedio cercano a cero, y
proveer máxima capacidad de respuesta del AGC luego de perturbaciones significativas.
La figura 8 muestra el diagrama correspondiente al filtro de la señal de frecuencia el cual en su
primera etapa incluye un filtrado de primer orden con una constante de tiempo (Tpf). La señal de
salida de la primera etapa se divide en dos componentes cuya fracción determinada por Cf
(parámetro menor o igual a 1) se trasmite directamente mientras que la fracción restante de la
señal se procesa con un segundo filtro de primer orden con constante de tiempo (Tu).

Freal

Figura 8. Diagrama Representativo del Filtro de Frecuencia


Referencia: Filtro de Frecuencia normalmente utilizado en un Sistema AGC

La respuesta típica del filtro con constantes de tiempo señaladas se muestra en la figura
siguiente.

BORRADOR

Time Difference Power Frequency Tpf 0 s


Unit Model Comparation Ratio Cr 0.6
Unit Model Time constant Tu 4 s

Figura 9. Representación de la Respuesta del Filtro de Frecuencia

Los ajustes de las constantes se realizan durante las pruebas de sintonía del AGC que se
desarrollen durante la puesta en servicio del AGC o durante el proceso de verificación de su
funcionamiento cuando esto se requiera.

5.8.6.2 Error de Control de Area (ACE)

El AGC calculará el error de control de área, ACE, que indicará el valor del déficit o exceso de
generación en un área de control y que será utilizado para determinar los controles de
generación que se deben emitir.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


24
El cálculo del valor del ACE se realizará periódicamente a intervalos de tiempo ajustables en el
rango entre 4 a 8 segundos. Inicialmente, para el COES este cálculo se realizará cada 5 segundos.
El control de generación realizado por el AGC se realizará en uno de los siguientes modos:
a. Frecuencia Constante ("FF – Flat Frequency"):
i. En el modo de control FF, el ACE deberá ser determinado por:

ACE = KBC*( F0-Fmed)

Dónde:
KBC: Factor K que estima la Característica de Frecuencia del bloque de control (
MW/Hz).
F0: Frecuencia de referencia (Hz) que para la operación normal corresponde a un
valor nominal de 60Hz Fmed: Frecuencia del sistema medida (Hz).

ii. Las áreas de control aisladas son controladas en un modo de frecuencia constante
iii. En el AGC se puede programar la frecuencia de referencia del sistema de potencia,
seleccionado un valor que puede ser diferente a 60Hz, indicando el momento (fecha y hora)
en el cual la frecuencia de referencia debe retornar a la frecuencia.

b. Intercambio Neto Constante ("FT - Flat Tie Line")


BORRADOR

i. En el modo de control FT, el ACE se determinará por:

ACE = (Pprog - Pmed)

Pprog: Potencia neta programada por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW).
Pmed: Potencia neta que fluye por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW). Se considera positiva cuando el intercambio sea
exportador.
KBC: Factor K que estima la Característica de Frecuencia del bloque de control
(MW/Hz).
Fmed: Frecuencia del sistema medida (Hz).
F0: Frecuencia de referencia (Hz).

c. Control de Intercambios y Frecuencia ("TLB - Tie Line Bias"):

i. En el modo de control TLB, el ACE se determinará por:

ACE = KBC*( F0-Fmed) + (Pprog - Pmed)


Dónde:

KBC: Factor K que estima la Característica de Frecuencia del bloque de control

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


25
(MW/Hz).
F0: Frecuencia de referencia (Hz).
Fmed: Frecuencia del sistema medida (Hz).
Pprog: Potencia neta programada por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW).
Pmed: Potencia neta que fluye por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW).

ii. Este modo se utiliza para controlar la generación de áreas de control


interconectadas. Este modo evita las acciones contradictorias entre los controles
de diferentes áreas de control, que pueden ocurrir cuando un área se controla en
el modo FF y las otras áreas en modo FT.

5.8.6.3 Lógica Anticipatoria

Para el filtrado del ACE, cuyos componentes de frecuencia se hayan filtrado previamente, se
procede a filtrar una parte de la señal que entra al controlador por medio de una lógica
anticipatoria de acuerdo con el diagrama de bloques mostrado en la figura. Esta lógica permite
adelantar la señal del ACE por medio de un integrador de forma a crear un componente de tipo
“feed-forward” que hace que el AGC responda mejor a condiciones resultante de grandes
BORRADOR

cambios de demanda. En consecuencia esta lógica no responde a pequeñas variaciones las


cuales se filtran con bandas muertas mientras que variaciones grandes del ACE sufren un
adelanto de fase.
Este diagrama ilustra las bandas muertas tanto para la parte superior como para la parte baja de
la señal y la constante de integración Tial del integrador. El resultado del integrador se pasa por
un limitador de señal de forma a limitar a un máximo la señal anticipatoria. Se muestra el
resultado de aplicar este filtrado a una señal con los parámetros de la lógica mostrados en la
tabla.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


26
Figura 10. Lógica Anticipatoria
BORRADOR

5.8.6.4 Característica de Regulación Combinada del Sistema (B) ≈ Bias (β)

La combinación de la respuesta del regulador y la carga ante desviaciones de la frecuencia se


representa por la característica de regulación combinada del Sistema (B).

Donde:

= Característica de Regulación (Estatismo equivalente)

D= Amortiguamiento de la carga sensible a la frecuencia


El Factor Bias (β) es el valor por el cual se afecta al error de frecuencia para obtener una relación
directa con el desvío de potencia pertinente.
Para un adecuado control del sistema en estado dinámico es necesario que el (β) sea lo más
cercano posible a la Característica (B).
Atendiendo la dinámica del sistema, la forma más adecuada de calcular el Bias, es a través del
tratamiento estadístico de los registros de eventos o fallas que se hayan presentado en el
sistema donde se tenga el valor de MW desbalance en el sistema por perdida de carga o
generación y el comportamiento de la frecuencia en cada una de las perturbaciones registradas

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


27
en un determinado periodo. Para generar una base de datos consistente, se recomienda que los
datos históricos sean recolectados de eventos y/o fallas presentados en un horizonte de entre 6
y 12 meses.
En la Figura 11 se muestra un ejemplo del comportamiento de la frecuencia ante un disturbio de
pérdida de generación.

CA

BA
BORRADOR

5 5

Figura 11. Respuesta de frecuencia ante pérdida de generación

Dónde:
A: es el valor de la frecuencia del SEIN en el instante inmediatamente anterior a la perturbación.
B: Punto en el cual la frecuencia alcanza la mayor desviación por acción del desbalance entre la
carga y la generación.
C: Valor de la frecuencia del SEIN inmediatamente después del aporte realizado por las unidades
de generación en respuesta de su Regulación Primaria.
Para el cálculo de la respuesta natural del sistema se define, para cada uno de los eventos
registrados, los valores de frecuencia identificados como los puntos A, B y C mostrados en la
Figura 7.
Partiendo del formula con la que se calcula error de control de área:

Dónde:

KBC: Factor K que estima la Característica de Frecuencia del bloque de control


(MW/Hz).
F0: Frecuencia de referencia (Hz).

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


28
Fmed: Frecuencia del sistema medida (Hz).
Pprog: Potencia neta programada por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW).
Pmed: Potencia neta que fluye por las interconexiones del bloque de control con
bloques adyacentes (MW).
Conociéndose que para sistemas interconectados el ACE es cero (0), para el área donde no se
presentó el disturbio y que KBC es equivalente al β se tiene que:

Se debe tener en cuenta que dentro de la selección de eventos a analizar no debe haberse dado
la actuación del esquema de desconexión de carga por baja frecuencia ni oscilaciones de
frecuencia.

5.8.6.5 Diagrama de Laplace del controlador del área

Hay que tener presente que los parámetros del lazo secundario de control deben ser tales que
permitan la actuación del control primario de las diferentes unidades de generación. Para lograr
tal fin, se debe tomar el máximo tiempo de respuesta de control primario de las unidades de una
área y asignarlo al parámetro Integration Time del controlador. Normalmente los demás
parámetros del controlador no cambian y los estándares son:
BORRADOR

Large Signal Gain: 75% Esta constante actúa como medio de sintonía del área (respuesta rápida o lenta),
sin cambiar la relación entre la parte proporcional e integral del controlador PI.

Small Signal Gain: 50% Es usado para determinar la sensibilidad del LFC ante pequeños valores del ACE.
Es valor puede estar en el intervalo (0,1).

Dead Band Factor: 5 Mw Minimiza la acción de control en lugares donde el ACE se comporta
aleatoriamente comparado con las regiones de control normal.

Integration Time: 20 S El valor de esta constante debe ser igual a la constante de tiempo de la unidad
más lenta del área.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


29
+

+
Small
Signal Gs = 0.5 1/(S*20)

Retardo
Integration
Máximo Valor - Time
del ACE
+ +
Ga = 0.8
+
Mínimo Valor Large Banda Muerta
Signal del ACE
del ACE
Figura 12. Controlador del área

5.8.6.6 Modos de Operación del AGC

Los siguientes son los modos de operación del AGC

MODOS DE OPERACIÓN DEL AGC


MODO DESCRIPCIÓN
ACTIVO Toda la información necesaria se recoge y se filtra, los
BORRADOR

cálculos se realizan y el control de las Unidad de Regulación


Secundaria se llevan a cabo normalmente;
MONITOREO Toda la información necesaria se recoge y se filtra, los cálculos
se realizan normalmente, pero el control de las URSs no se
realiza. El paso a este estado es realizado por el operador.

SUSPENDIDO Similar al estado de monitoreo del AGC. Toda la información


necesaria se recoge y se filtra, los cálculos se realizan
normalmente, pero el control de las URSs no se realiza. El AGC
permanece en el modo suspendido, mientras que existan
condiciones excepcionales en las que el AGC no debe estar
activo.

Dependiendo de la duración de las condiciones que originan


este modo se configura un regreso al modo activo (tiempo
menor a 1 minuto) o al desactivado.

DESACTIVADO No se realiza ninguna función del AGC incluyendo el control


de la generación.
Este modo se activa cuando se configuran una o varias de las
siguientes condiciones:
1.El AGC pasa de modo SUSPENDIDO a DESACTIVADO
2.Perdida de señales esenciales para el funcionamiento del

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


30
AGC que le impidan calcular el ACE
3.Tener control de al menos una URS con capacidad suficiente
para prestar el servicio de regulación secundaria

Modos de Operación de las Unidades

MODOS DE CONTROL DE LAS URS


MODO DESCRIPCIÓN
ACTIVA Se encuentra en estado normal de operación. En este
estado, la URS participa en el control y monitoreo realizado
por el AGC
INACTIVA Se encuentra conectada al AGC, pero el AGC no cuenta con la
URS para la regulación secundaria debido a un
comportamiento no satisfactorio, cuando existen problemas
de comunicación o cuando la reserva de generación de la URS
es insuficiente
DESCONECTADA Cuando URS se encuentra desconectada del
AGC. Este estado será consecuencia del paso del MRS a
control local o por desconexión o por pérdida de
comunicación con el MRS.

DESCONECTADA Cuando el COES desconecta en forma manual


POR EL COES la URS por razones ajenas a su comportamiento.
BORRADOR

Las URS que utilicen el MRS para controlar las UG controlarán individualmente estas unidades las
cuales podrán estar en uno de los modos descritos en la tabla siguiente. En caso que la URS
utilice su sistema de control para distribuir el control entre las UG que las componen estas URS
se asimilan a una UG y tendrían como grupo el modo de control descrito en la tabla siguiente.

MODOS DE CONTROL DE LAS UG


MODO DESCRIPCIÓN
Fuera de línea La UG no se encuentra conectada al sistema de potencia.
(Off-line) Se soportarán modos de operación suplementarios:
• No disponible para operación.
• Disponible para operación.
En Línea (On-line) La UG se encuentra conectada y sincronizada con el sistema
(bajo control de potencia. La unidad se encuentra bajo control local en la
local) planta. Se soportarán modos suplementarios de operación.

• Despacho Fijo. La salida de la unidad se fija por


el sistema de control de planta y no será modificada.
• Despacho Manual. La salida de la unidad es
controlada manualmente por la planta y puede ser
ajustada.
• Test – La unidad está bajo prueba (test).

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


31
Mientras se opera en cualquiera de los modos en línea, el punto
base de la unidad se configurará de acuerdo con la salida de
dicha unidad, haciéndose un seguimiento a la salida de la unidad
mientras se encuentre en el modo de operación en línea.
Suspensión Es el modo temporal que se ingresa automáticamente cuando el
AGC encuentra condiciones de excepción. La selección por el
usuario, de este modo de operación no será permitida.
En Control La unidad se encuentra bajo el control de la función AGC.
Prueba La unidad está siendo controlada por el AGC de forma que se
pueda sintonizar su funcionamiento. Normalmente, en modo de
prueba se deben poder enviar comandos de subida y bajada en
rampa programados y se dispone de todas las herramientas de
registro de datos para que se logre sintonizar el mejor
funcionamiento de la unidad bajo AGC. Para este modo se debe
coordinar con la URS el envío de mandos individuales a cada
unidad de la URS.

BORRADOR

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


32
5.9 Lista de información a intercambiar entre las URS y el COES. 

5.9.1 Información desde las unidades de generación equipadas con MRS
Por cada unidad (UG) se debe proporcionar:
Estado del interruptor; esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
Indicación de unidad sincronizada; esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
Condiciones locales de operación de las unidades:
o Estado del control Local/Remoto, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
Condiciones locales de operación de los reguladores de velocidad:
o Estado del control Local/Remoto, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
o Estado del control Manual/Automático, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
Alarmas:
Estas señales (agrupadas por unidad de generación) tendrán que ser enviadas a una DI del
MRS.
o Disparo de emergencia
o Disparo eléctrico.
o Disparo mecánico.
o Regulador de velocidad en falla/indisponible.
Potencia activa desde el regulador de velocidad, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una AI del
MRS.
Frecuencia desde el regulador de velocidad, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una AI del MRS.
Informar los límites máximos y mínimos de regulación de potencia de cada unidad de
generación, los límites serán registrados y fijados en la RTU del MRS en la etapa de diseño.
Informar los gradientes de regulación positivos y negativos (en MW/min) de cada unidad de
generación, los gradientes serán registrados y fijados en la RTU del MRS en la etapa de diseño.
Las señales de voltaje y corriente de salida de cada unidad de generación deberán ser cableadas
a cada medidor de energía.

5.9.2 Información desde las unidades de generación controladas por sistema de


control del agente generador
Por cada unidad se debe proporcionar:
Estado operativo de la URS y/o UG (ON/OFF) Información reportada en tiempo real de la
condición operativa de la unidad al sistema, para lo cual las URS deben enviar el conjunto de
señales que permitan determinar el estado de conectividad de la unidad. Esta información debe
tener un tiempo de refresco según la característica definida para los ciclos de operación del AGC
del COES.
Condiciones locales de operación de las unidades:

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


33
o Estado del control Local/Remoto
Potencia activa generada: Señal de potencia activa reportada en tiempo real por cada URS y/o
UG, Esta información debe tener un tiempo de refresco según la característica definida para los
ciclos de operación del AGC del COES.
Frecuencia (si está disponible)
Informar los límites máximos y mínimos de regulación de potencia de cada unidad de
generación, los límites serán registrados en la base de datos del AGC.
Informar los gradientes de regulación positivos y negativos (en MW/min) de cada unidad de
generación, los gradientes serán registrados serán registrados en la base de datos del AGC.

5.9.3 Información enviada desde el AGC del COES hacia la MRS o sistema de
control del agente generador
Regulación de potencia/frecuencia mediante órdenes de tipo pulsos o Setpoint.

5.10 Metodología para calcular el incremento de generación que


determina la respuesta dinámica teórica de la URS en cada Ciclo
de Operación. 

El siguiente diagrama de bloques presenta el modelamiento de las unidades que participan en el
AGC que se utiliza para calcular la respuesta esperada de la unidad la cual se compara con la
respuesta reportada por la unidad para verificar su seguimiento de los mandos de regulación
secundaria emitidos por el AGC y tomar consecuentemente las acciones necesarias en caso que
se detecte que la unidad se comporta en forma diferente a lo esperado.
Se anota que el modelamiento se aplica a URS con una o más unidades de generación y por lo
tanto el modelo de la turbina puede corresponder a una UG en particular (cuando el control es
individual como son las UG controladas por una MRS) o a un conjunto de UGs cuando el control
es aplica a un grupo implementado por ejemplo por el control de planta de un agente
generador.
El modelamiento de la unidad considera los siguientes elementos:
Retraso de tiempo (Delay) debido a comunicaciones, SCADA, etc. del lazo de control
El modelo del regulador de velocidad
Límites de la unidad
Respuesta esperada de la turbina

El mando de generación se pasa por un bloque que retrasa esta señal un número determinado
de ciclos de AGC de forma a modelar el retraso inherente al lazo de control, generando el
mando retrasado que se espera sea seguido por la generación entregada por la unidad.
El mando se corrige por la influencia esperada de la respuesta a frecuencia del regulador de
velocidad de la unidad lo cual corresponde a multiplicar el delta de frecuencia por el “Bias” de la
unidad. La señal resultante se compara contra los límites de la unidad.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


34
El modelo de la turbina se toma de los modelos definidos por el IEEE para este fin teniendo en
cuenta si la turbina es térmica o hidráulica. El ajuste de los parámetros del modelo de la turbina
(A y Tt) y el retraso (delay) se realiza durante el proceso de integración y sintonía de cada URS al
AGC del COES.

Figura 13. Esquema de comando de las unidades de generación

5.11 Los valores de las constantes T1, ESR_MAX y UR utilizadas para el


seguimiento de la respuesta de las URS, según lo establecido en el
numeral 2 del Anexo III.
Para el desarrollo de este numeral es importante revisar lo definido en el numeral 2 del Anexo III
de la PR-22:
5.11.1 Aspectos a tener en cuenta del Numeral 2 del Anexo III de la PR22 –
Seguimiento de la Respuesta
En cada Ciclo de Operación se declarará la respuesta dinámica de la URS como Aceptable o No
Aceptable, según la siguiente metodología:
• Se calcula la respuesta dinámica teórica de la URS, como la potencia que debería estar generando la
URS (Pmod,i) en respuesta a los requerimientos del COES (Preq,i)
• La respuesta dinámica teórica de la URS (Pmod,i) en un ciclo n se calculará como incremento de
generación teórica respecto al valor de la respuesta dinámica teórica en el ciclo anterior n-1, salvo
que se cumplan la condición para inicializar de valor, en cuyo caso será igual a la potencia actual de
la URS.
• La condición para inicializar el valor de la respuesta dinámica teórica de la URS en un ciclo n será
que haya un cambio en el estado de la URS entre el ciclo n-1 y el ciclo n salvo en el cambio de
ACTIVO a INACTIVO.
• Si la URS está en estado INACTIVO, no se calculará Preq,i, de modo que, a efectos de cálculo de la
respuesta dinámica teórica de la URS, se tomará como Preq,i el último valor calculado mientras la
URS estuvo en estado ACTIVO.
• Se calculan el Error de Respuesta de la URS (ERRi) y el Error de Respuesta Teórico de la URS (ERTi):

ERRi = |Preq,i – Pact,i| ERTi = |Preq,i – Pmod,i|


Dónde:

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


35
Preq,i: potencia total requerida a la URS i por el COES.
Pact,i: potencia actual de la URS i
• Se calcula el Error de Seguimiento de la URS (ESi):

ESi = ERRi – ERTi


• Se calcula el Error de Seguimiento Retardado de la URS (ESRi), aplicando la respuesta de un sistema
de primer orden con constante de tiempo T1 sobre la evolución de ES, y se limita su valor absoluto
mediante una constante ESR_MAX.
• Si la URS está en estado ACTIVO, se declara la condición de respuesta No Aceptable si el valor de
ESRi supera un cierto umbral (UR2) y Aceptable en caso contrario.
• Si la URS está en estado INACTIVO, se declara la condición de respuesta No Aceptable si el valor de
ESR supera un cierto umbral (UR1) y Aceptable en caso contrario.
• Los umbrales UR1 y UR2 estarán relacionados entre sí mediante una constante k, según la siguiente
expresión:

UR2 = (2k-1) UR1


• Los valores de T1, ESR_MAX, UR1 y k serán especificados por el COES y habrán de cumplir

0<T1<20s
ESR_MAX > (2k-1) UR1
0<k . UR1<min (RAS,RAB)
1<k<1,2

5.11.2 Sistema AGC del COES


Para dar cumplimiento a lo anteriormente descrito el COES adquirió un módulo AGC dentro del
sistema SCADA/EMS que realiza durante la operación de tiempo real, en cada ciclo de operación
de 5 segundos, el seguimiento a la respuesta de las URS bajo el control de Regulación
Secundaria, y para lo cual se describe a continuación el seguimiento realizado por dicho sistema,
de manera análoga a lo definido en la PR-22:
• Para determinar la potencia que debería estar generando la URS (Pmod,i), el sistema posee un
módulo de simulación que corresponde a las características reales de cada URS bajo control, y el
cual es ajustado durante las pruebas de sintonía e integración de cada URS al control maestro del
AGC del COES. Este módulo corresponde a lo definido en el numeral 2.11.
• Con base en la potencia simulada, la desviación entre la salida simulada y la salida real (UCE Unit
Control Error – este es equivalente ERR definido en la PR-22) es procesada mediante un filtro de
primer orden cuya constante de tiempo es denominada Time Constant UCE Filter (Esta constante
es equivalente T1 definido en la PR-22). En cumplimiento de lo requerido para la nota técnica se
determina que esta constante se ajuste en T1 = 20 segundos
• Para determinar si la respuesta es adecuada, se ajusta la función mediante el parámetro UCE
Threshold, este valor es dado en MW, y el cual es equivalente al ESR_MAX definido en la PR-22.
En cumplimiento de lo requerido para la nota técnica se determina que esta constante se ajuste
en ESR_MAX = 10 MW.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


36
• Si el UCE Unit Control Error es mayor de un valor definido en UCE Threshold la URS se pasa a
INACTIVO, y no se calculará Potencia requerida, hasta que regrese al umbral predefinido.
• Si durante un tiempo definido, (Unit Suspension Time) la máquina continúa en estado INACTIVO,
ésta será bloqueada por controlador. Este último estado corresponde al estado de No Aceptable
definido en la PR-22.
• Para efectos de ajustar la función, la constante Unit Suspension Time se ajustará en 5 minutos.

COES-SINAC junio de 2016


37
REQUERIMIENTOS
DEL
MÓDULO DE REGULACIÓN SECUNDARIA ( MRS )
Energy Management
Smart Grid Solutions & Services
Solutions
Spectrum Power™ 7
Version 1.20

Project: COES New Control System


(SCADA/AGC)

COES ID: Nº 10-2015


SIEMENS ID: P-013948

Requerimientos del Módulo de


Regulación Secundaria (MRS)
Disclaimer of Liability Copyright
This document has been subjected to rigorous technical review before being Copyright © Siemens AG 2015. All rights reserved.
published. It is revised at regular intervals, and any modifications and The disclosure, duplication, distribution and editing of this document, or
amendments are included in the subsequent issues. The content of this utilization and communication of the content are not permitted, unless
document has been compiled for information purposes only. Although authorized in writing. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or
Siemens AG has made best efforts to keep the document as precise and up- registration of a utility model or a design, are reserved.
to-date as possible, Siemens AG shall not assume any liability for defects
and damage which result through use of the information contained herein. Registered Trademarks
This content does not form part of a contract or of business relations; nor SICAM 1703® is a registered trademark of Siemens AG. Any unauthorized
does it change these. All obligations of Siemens AG are stated in the use is illegal. All other designations in this document can be trademarks
relevant contractual agreements. whose use by third parties for their own purposes can infringe the rights of
Siemens AG reserves the right to revise this document from time to time. the owner.
Documento: Requerimientos MRS
Edition: 04.2015
Version of the product described: v1.20

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 2 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
Tabla de Contenido

1 INTRODUCCIÓN ......................................................................................................................................................4
2 CARACTERÍSTICAS DEL MRS....................................................................................................................................4
3 MÓDULOS I/O E INTERFACES DISPONIBLES EN EL MRS ..........................................................................................4
4 REQUERIMIENTOS ..................................................................................................................................................5
4.1 REQUERIMIENTOS PARA EL ALMACENAMIENTO .................................................................................................................5
4.2 REQUERIMIENTOS PARA LA INSTALACIÓN .........................................................................................................................5
4.3 REQUERIMIENTOS PARA LA OPERACIÓN...........................................................................................................................6
4.3.1 Información desde las unidades de generación .............................................................................................6
4.3.2 Esquemas de control ......................................................................................................................................7
4.3.3 Sistema de sincronización (GPS) ....................................................................................................................7
4.4 REQUERIMIENTOS PARA EL DISEÑO ................................................................................................................................7
4.5 REQUERIMIENTOS PARA LAS PRUEBAS EN SITIO Y PUESTA EN SERVICIO .................................................................................8
4.5.1 Actividades previas ........................................................................................................................................8
4.5.2 Durante las pruebas .......................................................................................................................................8
5 RECOMENDACIONES ..............................................................................................................................................8
6 ACLARACIONES ......................................................................................................................................................8

Anexos:
Anexo N° 1: Arquitectura del sistema de regulación secundaria
Anexo N° 2: Datasheets de los equipos del sistema de regulación secundaria

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 3 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
1 Introducción
Este documento presenta los requerimientos necesarios para la instalación, operación, diseño,
pruebas en sitio y puesta en servicio de los sistemas MRS en cada una de las instalaciones que
ejecutarán la regulación secundaria del SEIN que opten por utilizar este módulo proporcionado por
el COES.

2 Características del MRS


Los MRS tienen como principales características:
 El elemento principal del MRS está basado en una RTU como unidad de procesamiento y
comunicación para la regulación secundaria.
 La interfaz grafica local – HMI del MRS está basado en una pantalla táctil touch screen de
12’’ desde la cual estará disponible la visualización y ajuste de potencias para la regulación
secundaria.
 El MRS cuenta con módulos I/O e interfaces de comunicación eléctrica (protocolos
estándares) para la interoperabilidad con los elementos asociadas a la unidad de
generación y que estén involucradas en la regulación secundaria de los mismos.
 El MRS está diseñado para realizar la función de regulación secundaria en 03 unidades
por planta de generación.
El sistema MRS es expandible hasta seis unidades de generación, se debe tener en
cuenta que en caso de requerirse el uso de esta expansión se requiere de coordinación
entre el agente generador y el COES quien definirá esto con SIEMENS.
 Las dimensiones de los gabinetes donde estarán instalados los sistemas MRS son de
1800x600x600mm (altura x ancho x profundidad), color RAL 7035 y cuenta con
resistencias de calefacción, ventilador y termostato.
Se considera que todos los equipos del MRS se encuentran instalados en un gabinete
nuevo, para evitar el riesgo de no contar con las condiciones necesarias que perjudique
el funcionamiento del MRS.

3 Módulos I/O e interfaces disponibles en el MRS

Cada uno de los sistemas a instalar dispone de las siguientes interfaces:


 3 módulos, cada uno con 16 entradas digitales (DI) con precisión de 1ms, 110/220 VDC.
 3 módulos, cada uno con 08 salidas digitales (DO) tipo relé, 24-220 VDC / 230 VAC.
 3 módulos, cada uno con 04 entradas analógicas (AI), ± 20mA / ± 10V.
 3 módulos, cada uno con 04 Salidas analógicas (AO), ± 20mA / ± 10 mA ± 10 V.
 1 interfaz Ethernet en protocolo IEC 60870-5-104, mandatorio para comunicación con el
AGC.
El MRS cuenta con interfaz en IEC 60870-5-104 para la comunicación con el AGC y la IHM
local, tener en cuenta que se está considerando dos puertos de comunicación para el
enlace con el AGC.

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 4 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
 1 interfaz Ethernet en protocolo IEC 60870-5-104, para integración de los reguladores de
velocidad de cada unidad de generación del MRS.
 1 interfaz serial en protocolo Modbus, para integración de los reguladores de velocidad de
cada unidad de generación del MRS.
 Medidores de energía.
3 medidores SICAM P55 con 03 entradas de corriente y 03 entradas de tensión para el
registro de los valores eléctricos de las unidades de generación.
Quedará bajo el criterio del agente generador el uso de los medidores suministrados para
el envió de señales de corriente y tensión al MRS o en su defecto enviar dichas señales
mediante lazos de corriente de 4–20 mA., teniendo en cuenta la cantidad de entradas y
módulos del MRS.
4 Requerimientos
A continuación se describen brevemente los requerimientos necesarios para llevar con éxito todas
las tareas asociadas a la instalación, operación, diseño, pruebas en sitio y puesta en servicio de
los MRS.

4.1 Requerimientos para el Almacenamiento

El despacho de los gabinetes es responsabilidad de SIEMENS y lo realizará sobre un vehículo de


transporte adecuado, debidamente embalados, hasta las instalaciones del agente generador con
quien el COES acuerde la prestación del servicio de regulación secundaria y opte por la utilización
del MRS.

Cuando se tenga los gabinetes en sitio, el agente generador debe realizar lo siguiente:

 Descarga de gabinetes MRS desde el vehículo de transporte.


 Almacenaje del gabinete MRS en un espacio cerrado, con ventilación adecuada y libre de
condensación donde se preserve la integridad de los equipos.

4.2 Requerimientos para la Instalación

Para la instalación del MRS en cada planta de generación se requiere lo siguiente:


 La tensión auxiliar necesaria para la operación de todos los elementos que comprenden el
MRS es de 110 ó 220Vdc y 220Vac para los sistemas auxiliares, el agente generador será
responsable de realizar las habilitaciones necesarias para asegurar su energización.
 El gabinete MRS deberá estar instalado en un espacio que cuente con las condiciones de
climatización adecuadas, es decir deberá estar acondicionado para soportar temperaturas
máximas de 40 °C y una humedad relativa no mayor al 80 %.
 El agente generador deberá definir, adecuar el espacio y ejecutar el anclaje de los
gabinetes MRS.
 El agente generador es responsable de ejecutar la ingeniería de interface eléctrica y de
control, así como de proveer los elementos necesarios para lograr el envío y recepción de
información desde y hacia cada uno de los subsistemas de las unidades de generación
involucrados en la regulación secundaria.

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 5 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
 El agente generador es responsable de ejecutar la ingeniería y adecuaciones civiles
necesarias, para la integración del sistema MRS con los subsistemas de las unidades de
generación involucrados en la regulación secundaria.
 El agente generador es responsable de ejecutar la ingeniería de interface eléctrica y de
control, así como de proveer los elementos necesarios para lograr el envío y recepción de
información desde el sistema MRS hacia el AGC.
 El agente generador es responsable de ejecutar la ingeniería y adecuaciones civiles
necesarias, para la integración del sistema MRS con el AGC.

4.3 Requerimientos para la Operación


Para la operación del MRS en cada planta de generación es necesario disponer de:

4.3.1 Información desde las unidades de generación

Por cada unidad se debe proporcionar:

 Estado del interruptor; esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
 Indicación de unidad sincronizada; esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
 Condiciones locales de operación de las unidades:
o Estado del control Local/Remoto, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
 Condiciones locales de operación de los reguladores de velocidad:
o Estado del control Local/Remoto, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del MRS.
o Estado del control Manual/Automático, esta señal tendrá que ser enviada a una DI del
MRS.
 Alarmas:
Estas señales (agrupadas por unidad de generación) tendrán que ser enviadas a una DI
del MRS.
o Disparo de emergencia
o Disparo eléctrico.
o Disparo mecánico.
o Governador en falla/indisponible.
 Parámetro de potencia activa desde el regulador de velocidad, esta señal tendrá que ser
enviada a una AI del MRS.
 Parámetro de frecuencia desde el regulador de velocidad, esta señal tendrá que ser
enviada a una AI del MRS.
 Informar los límites máximos y mínimos de regulación de potencia de cada unidad de
generación, los límites serán registrados y fijados en la RTU del MRS en la etapa de
diseño.
 Informar los gradientes de regulación positivos y negativos (en MW/min) de cada unidad de
generación, los gradientes serán registrados y fijados en la RTU del MRS en la etapa de
diseño.

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 6 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
 Las señales de voltaje y corriente de salida de cada unidad de generación deberán ser
cableadas a cada medidor de energía.

4.3.2 Esquemas de control

El regulador de velocidad deberá contar con uno de los siguientes esquemas de control para
poder realizar la regulación secundaria sobre cada unidad de generación, estas opciones de
regulación estarán habilitadas desde el propio MRS (interfaz local).

 Regulación de potencia/frecuencia mediante recepción de órdenes de tipo pulsos.


 Regulación de potencia/frecuencia mediante recepción órdenes de tipo setpoint con lazo
de corrientes de 4-20mA.
 Regulación de potencia/frecuencia mediante órdenes de tipo pulso y/o setpoint y a través
de protocolo Modbus serial.
 Regulación de potencia/frecuencia mediante órdenes de tipo pulso y/o setpoint y a través
de protocolo IEC 60870-5-104.
Tener en cuenta que la precisión de regulación no está definida por el protocolo sino por el equipo
regulador de velocidad de cada unidad de generación. Para la regulación se requiere de un lazo
de control cerrado, por lo cual cada unidad de generación deberá confirmar la recepción de las
órdenes de regulación al MRS.

4.3.3 Sistema de sincronización (GPS)

Para la estampa de tiempo de los MRS se requiere que el agente generador proporcione una
señal de sincronización en protocolo NTP (puede ser un GPS local existente) la cual es
recomendable para alcanzar una suficiente precisión con el estampa de tiempo, se tiene la opción
de realizar la sincronización por protocolo IEC 60870-5-104, teniendo en cuenta que el servidor de
tiempo proporcionado por el COES pueda emitir comandos de sincronización. La conexión del
MRS con el servidor de tiempo estará disponible en fibra óptica (multimodo) o cable SFTP.

4.4 Requerimientos para el Diseño


En la fase de diseño se deben cumplir las siguientes tareas previas:
 El agente generador debe entregar al COES toda la información descrita en el numeral
“4.2 Requerimientos para la instalación” y “4.3 Requerimientos para la operación” en un
periodo de 7 días a partir de la adjudicación de la Provisión Base para la prestación del
servicio de regulación secundaria.
 El agente generador debe entregar al COES el mapping de señales en protocolo Modbus o
IEC 60870-5-104 (según aplique el caso de integración) de los reguladores de velocidad
asociado a cada unidad de generación.
 El agente generador debe entregar al COES el perfil de comunicación en protocolo
Modbus o IEC 60870-5-104 (según aplique el caso de integración) de los reguladores de
velocidad asociado a cada unidad de generación.

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 7 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
4.5 Requerimientos para las Pruebas en Sitio y Puesta en Servicio
Para el inicio de las pruebas en sitio y su posterior puesta en servicio el agente generador deberá
certificar que las siguientes actividades han culminado satisfactoriamente:

4.5.1 Actividades previas

 Completa y correcta culminación del montaje del gabinete MRS.


 Completa y correcta finalización de las tareas asociadas a la interface eléctrica y de
control de las señales de cada unidad de generación
 Completa y correcta finalización de los trabajos referentes a la interface eléctrica y de
control, del medio de comunicación con el AGC.
 Finalización completa y exitosa del conexionado de señales de voltaje y corriente hacia los
medidores de energía.
 Parametrización del regulador de velocidad de cada unidad en protocolo Modbus o IEC
60870-5-104 (según sea el caso) para iniciar las pruebas de interoperabilidad de dicho
equipo con el MRS.

4.5.2 Durante las pruebas

Específicamente durante las pruebas el agente generador deberá garantizar:

 Completa disponibilidad de las unidades de generación para poder realizar las pruebas de
señalización (información asociada a la regulación secundaria) desde y hacia los
subsistemas involucrados por cada unidad de generación.
 Completa disponibilidad de las unidades de generación para poder someterlas a las
pruebas de regulación secundaria.
 El acompañamiento de un especialista con amplio conocimiento del funcionamiento de las
unidades de generación de cada planta quien trabajará en conjunto con el personal de
SIEMENS.
 La presencia de un especialista con amplio conocimiento del funcionamiento de los
reguladores de velocidad de las unidades de generación de cada planta quien trabajará en
conjunto con el personal de SIEMENS.

5 Recomendaciones
Se recomienda que el gabinete MRS esté ubicado en la sala de mando de la planta de
generación o en su defecto en la sala de tableros en la cual están ubicadas los demás
tableros asociados al control de las unidades de generación, esto permitirá un acceso
rápido y eficiente para la operación del MRS.

6 Aclaraciones
 El módulo de regulación secundaria está diseñado bajo un concepto estándar para realizar
dicha función sobre unidades de generación que garanticen su interoperabilidad con
tecnologías acordes a la actualidad, por lo tanto el agente generador deberá garantizar que

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 8 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
cualquier adecuación por temas de tecnología o disponibilidad de los subsistemas para su
interconexión con el MRS será de su entera responsabilidad.
 El agente generador es responsable de inconvenientes que puedan presentarse en la
integración de los reguladores de velocidad de las unidades de generación, derivado de la
no vigencia de los mismos o por desperfectos que puedan tener dichos equipos.
 El agente generador es responsable del suministro de conversores de medio para lograr la
integración de los reguladores de velocidad con el MRS o de otro dispositivo electrónico no
especificado durante el SoW.

Requerimientos MRS Pág. 9 de 9


Versión 1.0.0.0
© Siemens AG, 2015. All Rights Reserved
ANEXOS
ANEXO N°1

ARQUITECTURA DEL SISTEMA DE REGULACION SECUNDARIA


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

COES - AGC
A A

B B

UNIDAD 1
TABLERO MRS

IEC 60870-5-104
HMI SICAM 230
Regulador de
Veocidad
Periféricos (1)
RTU TM 1703
C Ax1703 C
Ax1703
UNIDAD 2
DI DI DI AI AI AI DO DO
A
Periféricos

SICAM P
DO AO AO AO Regulador de
Veocidad
(1)

SICAM P
UNIDAD 3

SICAM P
D D
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104

MODBUS Regulador de
Veocidad
SWITCH -B200 (1)

RS900

E E

Conexión LAN (fibra óptica) Conexión IRIG-B (cable coaxial) RTU = Unidad Terminal Remota MC F-C = Conversor de fibra óptica-cobre ETH = Puerto Ethernet
Conexión LAN (SFTP) Conexión IRIG-B (SFTP) PCU = Unidad de Procesamiento y Comunicación MC S = Conversor serial RS232/RS485 Pn = Puerto Ethernet en switches
Conexión Serial (SFTP) Conexión Ax1703 (USB) PRE = Elemento de protocolo CH1 = Canal 1 IEC 61850 (1) = Equipo no es parte del alcance

F Conexión Serial (fibra ótica) HMI = Interfaz Hombre-Máquina CH2 = Canal 2 IEC 61850 F

Conexión Serial Time Signal (SFTP) STS = Serial Time Signal P-SYNC = Puerto de sincronización IRIG-B
O. AQUIJE

Fecha 06/07/05
MODULO DE REGULACION SECUNDARIA C. VALVERDE
Dib. SIEMENS
MRS SIEMENS ARQUITECTURA DEL SISTEMA DE
A Rev. SIEMENS REGULACIÓN SECUNDARIA
(4)G69176 F2006-XXX
Revisión Nota Fecha Nomb. Appro. SIEMENS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

COES - AGC
A A

B B

UNIDAD 1
TABLERO MRS

IEC 60870-5-104
HMI SICAM 230
Regulador de
Veocidad
Periféricos (1)
RTU TM 1703
C Ax1703 C
Ax1703
UNIDAD 2
DI DI DI AI AI AI DO DO
A
Periféricos

SICAM P
DO AO AO AO Regulador de
Veocidad
(1)

SICAM P
UNIDAD 3

SICAM P
D D
IEC 60870-5-103
IEC 60870-5-104
Regulador de
Veocidad
SWITCH -B200 (1)

RS900

E E

Conexión LAN (fibra óptica) Conexión IRIG-B (cable coaxial) RTU = Unidad Terminal Remota MC F-C = Conversor de fibra óptica-cobre ETH = Puerto Ethernet
Conexión LAN (SFTP) Conexión IRIG-B (SFTP) PCU = Unidad de Procesamiento y Comunicación MC S = Conversor serial RS232/RS485 Pn = Puerto Ethernet en switches
Conexión Serial (SFTP) Conexión Ax1703 (USB) PRE = Elemento de protocolo CH1 = Canal 1 IEC 61850 (1) = Equipo no es parte del alcance

F Conexión Serial (fibra ótica) HMI = Interfaz Hombre-Máquina CH2 = Canal 2 IEC 61850 F

Conexión Serial Time Signal (SFTP) STS = Serial Time Signal P-SYNC = Puerto de sincronización IRIG-B
O. AQUIJE

Fecha 06/07/05
MODULO DE REGULACION SECUNDARIA C. VALVERDE
Dib. SIEMENS
MRS SIEMENS
A Rev. SIEMENS
(4)G69176 F2006-XXX
Revisión Nota Fecha Nomb. Appro. SIEMENS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ANEXO N°2

DATASHEETS DE LOS EQUIPOS DEL SISTEMA DE REGULACIÓN SECUNDARIA


SICAM TM

System Data Sheet

Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 MC6-007-2.03


Table of Contents
Introduction.................................................................................................................................. 3
Application Overview................................................................................................................ 10
System Overview....................................................................................................................... 12
Engineering................................................................................................................................ 27
Function Packages.................................................................................................................... 30
Compatibility.............................................................................................................................. 51
Technical Specifications .......................................................................................................... 52
Mechanical Design and Installation ........................................................................................ 64
Ordering Information ................................................................................................................ 66

Disclaimer of Liability Copyright


Although we have carefully checked the contents of this publication Copyright © Siemens AG 2013
for conformity with the hardware and software described, we cannot The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its
guarantee complete conformity since errors cannot be excluded. contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offend-
The information provided in this manual is checked at regular ers will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by
intervals and any corrections that might become necessary are patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are re-
included in the next releases. Any suggestions for improvement are served.
welcome.

Subject to change without prior notice.

Document Label:
SIC1703-DSTM1703ACP-ENG_V2.03
Release date:
20.06.2013

2 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Introduction

Requirements

It is the purpose of automation devices to support us in the cost-effective and safe manage-
ment of technical processes.

In conventional concepts, processes were monitored and controlled via remote terminal units
while non-communicating local automatic controllers (e.g. relay controllers, programmable
controllers, analog controllers) would handle automation. As a result, there was a multitude of
different interfaces, making global monitoring nearly impossible.

Meanwhile conditions have changed from a commercial, IT-related and technological view-
point. Cost-effectiveness has become a crucial factor of competitiveness. Consequently, this
calls in almost all processes for the improved utilization of existing resources, that is, moving
closer and closer toward tapping their full performance capacities. To avoid neglecting reliabil-
ity requirements in this process, a greater amount of information is necessary. By that we
mean more information about the process (utilization rate, state) and about the automation
system itself.

Due to the technological progress, automation devices consequently have become more
powerful and intelligent. All of a sudden, they are now able to assume many additional func-
tions - starting with preprocessing tasks and up to the complete networking of all automation
devices.

Thus, it was only a question of time until this intelligence could be functionally decentralized
and at the same time be put to local distributed use, directly at the process. The aim of func-
tional decentralization is the creation of

• a better clarity
• autonomous functional units, and thus
• higher availability.

The aim of local distribution and the resulting reduced number of cabling routes is the
achievement of

• a reliable signal transmission


• streamlining the assembly effort
• reduction of cable materials and accessories
• down to doing without intermediate terminals.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 3


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
This requires modern automation concepts giving due account to the greater expansion of the
automation system, all the way up to the integration of increasingly smaller system compo-
nents. In this context, the additional benefit sought in terms of cost-effectiveness and reliability
is

• the reduction or avoidance of parallel interfaces between the various automation levels,
and
• the improved adaptation to the process with its specific signals and functions to be ac-
complished through closer bonding to the primary process

This leads to the creation of non-market-sector-specific but also market-sector-specific re-


quirements which - unlike pure programmable controller applications - reach way beyond the
sole performance of process control functions and simple serial data coupling.

What is required are:

• the balanced coexistence


─ of the world of automation running periodically (equidistantly and thus time-
consistently) for purposes of guaranteed reproducible reaction times and including
freely definable logic, open-loop, and closed-loop control functions
─ the parameter-settable, standardized spontaneous world of telecontrol and communi-
cations

• means of communication adapted to the application and linked with consistent integral so-
lutions
─ LAN communication via TCP/IP with intensive networking possibilities,
─ local serial couplings and remote communication options
─ high interoperability also with regard to other devices by using default communications
to IEC 60870-5
─ system-consistent service functions such as real-time acquisition, test and diagnostic
functions, as well as

• consistent engineering and straightforward service


─ systemwide consistent CAE tools with state-of-the-art and ergonomically advanced full-
graphics user interface
─ replacement of spares without CAE tool

• high operational reliability and availability ensured by


─ modular structure and continuous system monitoring

• cost-effective adaptation to process-specific requirements


─ of signal processing (type of signals, voltage level), and the
─ use of "intelligent terminal modules"
− for the acquisition of the process peripherals, as direct and close to the primary
equipment as possible
− to avoid costly cabling and additional intermediate terminals.

4 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Longevity through Continuity and Innovation

Following the principle of our product development, SICAM TM has high functionality and
flexibility, through the implementation of innovative and reliable technologies, on the stable
basis of a reliable product platform.

For this, the system concept (Automation, Control and Protection) creates the technological
preconditions. Balanced functionality permits the flexible combination of automation, telecon-
trol and communication tasks. Complemented with the scalable performance and various re-
dundancy configurations, an optimal adaptation to the respective requirements of the process
is achieved.

SICAM TM is thus perfectly suitable for automation with integrated telecontrol technology as

• Telecontrol substation or central device


• Automation unit with autonomous functional groups
• Data node, station control device, front-end or gateway
• With local or remote peripherals
• For simple mounting on standard rail

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 5


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
SICAM TM – the Forward-Looking Product

The following highlights make SICAM TM to a forward-looking product:

• Non-market-sector-specific product, therefore high product stability and versatile fields of


application
─ Hydroelectric power stations (turbine governor, process control)
─ Electrical energy distribution and transmission
─ Oil/Gas pipelines
─ Tunnels

• Versatile communication
─ up to 4 serial interfaces according to IEC 60870-5-101/103
─ LAN/WAN communication according to IEC 60870-5-104
─ various third-party protocols possible

• Easy engineering
─ SICAM TOOLBOX II
─ Object-orientation
─ Creation of open- and closed-loop control application programs according to
IEC 61131-3
─ all engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely

• Plug & play for spare parts


─ Storage of parameters and firmware on a flash card
─ spare part exchange does not require additional loading with SICAM TOOLBOX II

• Open system architecture


─ Modular, open and technology-independent system structure
─ System-consistent further development and therefore an innovative and future-proof
product

• Mechanical design
─ Assembly on 35 mm DIN rail
─ Simplified connection system in the form of the "intelligent terminal"
─ LEDs for process and operating states

• The intelligent terminal – SICAM TM


─ Direct connection of actuators and sensors with wire cross-sections up to 2.5 mm²
─ Can be located remotely up to 200 m
─ Binary input/output also for 110/220 VDC

6 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Non-Market-Sector-Specific Product, therefore High Product Sta-
bility and Versatile Fields of Application

Our philosophy: we provide basic products that can be used as is in several market sectors,
and market-sector products developed out of the basic products by specific engineering, how-
ever, standardized for respective market sectors.

Advantages:

• If a customer has applications in several market sectors and fields of use, he may rest as-
sured that the products will be able to communicate with one another and behave identi-
cally within an automation network and in relation to the user (system behavior, engineer-
ing, maintenance). Example: turbine governor and hydro process control.
• Within the application, it is possible to choose the most cost-effective product, depending
on data volume and the number of communication interfaces.
• Using the same product in several market sectors also means less product diversity (no
more "dedicated systems") and consequently greater versatility in use and thus enhanced
product stability.

Versatile Communication Capability

With SICAM TM, a variety of media can be utilized for local and remote communication. (wire
connections, FO, radio, dial-up traffic, GSM, GPRS, WAN, LAN, field bus etc.)

Through the simple installation of serial interface modules, in total up to 4 communication in-
terfaces are possible in one SICAM TM, whereby a different individual protocol can be used
for each interface.

For standard communication, protocols according to IEC 60870-5-101/103/104 as well as


IEC 61850 are implemented. The consistent implementation of these standards guarantees a
uniform addressing from the source through to the sink.

Besides the previously mentioned standard protocols, there are also a variety of third-party
protocols available (DNP 3.0, Modbus etc.). Through this, the seamless integration into exist-
ing automation networks is enabled, whereby a long-term safeguarding of already effected in-
vestments is ensured.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 7


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Easy Engineering

An essential aspect in the overall economical consideration are the costs that occur for the
creation, maintenance and service. For this, the reliable SICAM TOOLBOX II is used.

• Object-orientation
The object-orientation makes it possible to also utilize the same characteristics of same-
type primary-technology units and operational equipment (e.g. disconnectors, circuit brea-
kers, feeders etc.) for the configuration. The close coupling with the design tool ensures
the consistent, uniform documentation of the entire plant through to circuit diagram.
Through this, considerable rationalization results with engineering.

• Open-loop and closed-loop control according to IEC 61131-3


Open- and closed-loop control application programs are created by means of CAEx plus
according to IEC 61131-3, a standard that is generally accepted and recognized in the
market. As a result, the training periods are reduced considerably.

• All engineering tasks can also be carried out remotely


All engineering tasks, from the system diagnostic through to the online test, can also be
performed remotely with the SICAM TOOLBOX II. For this, a separate communication link
between SICAM TOOLBOX II and SICAM TM is not necessary: every available communi-
cation interface can be used. Using further automation units of the SICAM RTUs product
family, the SICAM TOOLBOX II can be remotely positioned over an arbitrary number of
hierarchies.

The access to the engineering data is fundamentally protected by a password.

Plug & Play for Spare Parts

With the replacement of spare parts, Plug & Play becomes a reality: one needs no special tool
for this, even loading is no longer necessary. Thereby, work during a service operation is re-
duced to a minimum.

All data of an automation unit - such as firmware


and parameters - are stored non-volatile centrally
on an exchangeable flash card. With a restart of
the automation unit, and also with a restart of indi-
vidual modules, all necessary data are automati-
cally transferred from the flash card to all CPUs
and modules.

Consequently, with the exchange of modules, new


loading is no longer required, since new modules
Flash card for data storage
obtain all data from the storage card.

8 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Open System Architecture

The basis for this automation concept is a modular, open and consequently technology-
independent system architecture for processing, communication and peripherals (multi-
processor system, firmware).

Standardized interfaces between the individual elements again permit, even with further de-
velopments, the latest state of technology to be implemented, without having to modify the ex-
isting elements. In this way, a longevity of the product and consequently investment security
and continuity can be ensured.

Every board and every module on which a firmware can run, forms together with the function-
determining firmware a system element.

The adaptation to the specific requirements of the application is achieved through the individ-
ual configuration and through the loading of standard firmware and parameters. Within their
defined limits, the parameters thereby not only influence the behavior of the firmware func-
tions, but also that of the hardware functions.

With that, for all module types, all mechanical parameter settings are omitted, such as for in-
stance the changing of jumpers or loads and thus enables not only the online change, but also
a consistent documentation of the set parameters by the SICAM TOOLBOX II as well as a
simplified storage.

Mechanical Design– Simple Process Interfacing

Generally, when developing the mechanical design, we focused on achieving highest ease in
handling. As a result, all components of SICAM TM were adapted to be mounted on a DIN
rail.

An essential feature of SICAM TM is its efficient and simple way of interfacing to the process
signals. This is accomplished by so-called I/O modules standing out for a robust housing, reli-
able contacting, and sound electronics.

The I/O modules are arranged side by side on a DIN rail. Contact between them is established
as soon as they engage with one another, without requiring any further manual intervention.
Even so, it is still possible to replace every single module separately.

A clearly structured connection front featuring status indicator LEDs makes sure that things at
the site remain clear and transparent. The structure of the terminals permits direct sen-
sor/actuator wiring without requiring the use of intermediate terminals with wire cross-sections
up to 2.5 mm2. Modules for binary inputs and outputs up to 220 VDC open further saving po-
tentials at the interface level.

The I/O modules may, depending on the requirements, be equipped with either an electrical or
an optical bus, whereby the peripheral signals can be acquired very close to their point of ori-
gin. Consequently, wide cabling can be reduced to a minimum.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 9


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Application Overview

Introduction

Due to the modular architecture, SICAM TM can be used in a variety of ways:

• Front End, Gateway


• Process control applications
• Automation applications
• Turbine governor
• Station control device
• Sub-node
• Telecontrol substation

In principle, for this all necessary functionalities are available. The actual application is defined
simply through the corresponding configuration and parameterization.

SICAM 230 TOOLBOX II

IEC 60870-5-104

Front End,
Gateway
process control
applications,
turbine controller
IEC 60870-5-104
IEC 60870-5-104

IEC 60870-5-101

dial-up traffic

RTU
sub node,
station
control SICAM 230
device
IEC 61850

IEC 60870-5-104 / IEC 61850

IEC 60870-5-101 IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 60870-5-103

RTU
integrated bay control unit +protection

10 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Fields of Use

Front End

Due to the number of interfaces and the variety of protocols available, SICAM TM is perfectly
suitable for the use as front end for a process control system.

All telecontrol substations – regardless of which manufacturer and over which protocol – are
connected to SICAM TM. In the front end, the signal processing and adaptation takes place
for the respective control system. From the perspective of the control system, there is no dif-
ference which protocol and which system behavior the substation actually has.

Process Control Applications, Automation Applications, Turbine


Governor

Open- and closed-loop control application programs are created by means of CAEx plus ac-
cording to IEC 61131-3, a standard that is generally accepted and recognized in the market.

In SICAM TM, at every slot a system element can be fitted with open-/closed-loop control func-
tion. Through this and due to the modularity, SICAM TM is suitable for many applications: from
smaller automation applications through turbine governor up to complex process control appli-
cations. Naturally, all applications can also be combined.

Station Control Device, Sub-Node

The functionality of a station control device can be simply regarded as a combination of the
functionality of a front end (interfacing of diverse bay devices, protective devices, processing
of the data for the power system control) and the functionality of process control applications
(open- and closed loop control application programs), and is therefore perfectly suited for this
application. In addition, further telecontrol peripherals could also be installed in the station
control device, through which telecontrol station and station control device could be united in
one device.

Telecontrol Substation

For telecontrol applications there is a modular, versatile periphery available for the process
data interfacing.

Especially due to the possibility of being able to remotely locate SICAM RTUs peripherals,
SICAM TM supports peripheral elements installed centrally and decentralized. Flexible com-
munication functions also permit redundant communication and communication over stand-by
transmission lines.

Naturally, arbitrary open- and closed-loop control application programs can be realized in
SICAM TM with CAEx plus, through which, at the same time and to the same degree,
SICAM TM can become a remote terminal unit and an automation unit in one.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 11


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
System Overview

System Architecture

Structure

SICAM TM is an automation unit of the system family SICAM RTUs and is structured from the
following elements:

• 1 Master control element


• Up to 4 protocol elements for the communications
─ mountable on the master control element

• Up to 16 peripheral elements
─ modular expandable and detachable

• Up to 4 businterface modules

Master control element Bus interface module (electrical) Bus interface module (optical)
RES
LOC
 10 

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK
ER

PUSH TO
RELEASE
6,&$0

X15

X16

6,&$0
10
X14
X5
X11
X10

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
SIM0

FB
TB

SI1 (ETO)
PUSH TO
RELEASE

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC

24-60VDC
X2

X13
PWR

Peripheral element
Max. 8 I/O-modules

TS35 rail
Peripheral control module (elektrical or optical)

Power supply module

12 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Configuration

The following figures show examples for the connection of the periphery to the master control
element.

Further configuration examples can be found in the manual SICAM RTUs Platforms,
Configuration Automation Units and Automation Networks (refer to Literature).

Direct electrical connection of up to 2 peripheral elements

CP-6014

RES
LOC

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/ PK

/ PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
 10 

6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X10

X11

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
SIM0

FB
TB

SI1 (ETO)
RELEASE
PUSH TO

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC

24-60VDC
X2

X13
PWR

Communication with other


automation units

Ax 1703 peripheral bus (electrical)


16 Mbps
USB cable, length up to 3 m

....

2
....

....

1
....

max. 8 I/O-modules

PE-6410
PS-663x

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 13


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Connection of up to 16 peripheral elements via bus interface (electrical)

CP-6014 Note:
all in all up to 16 peripheral elements

RES
LOC

RY

- 01

SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/ PK

/ PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
 10 

6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X10

X11

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

FB X4

WD

ER
SIM0

Ax 1703 peripheral bus (electrical)


TB

SI1 (ETO)
PUSH TO
RELEASE

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC
X2

24-60VDC

X13
16 Mbps

PWR
patch cable, length up to 3 m

Communication with other


automation units 1 ... 4

CM-0843

Ax 1703 peripheral bus (electrical)


16 Mbps
USB cable, length up to 3 m ....

16
....

....

15
....
..........

....

1
....

max. 8 I/O-modules

PE-6410
PS-663x

14 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Connection of up to 16 peripheral elements via bus interface (optical)

CP-6014 Note:
all in all up to 16 peripheral elements

RES
LOC

RY

- 01

SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/ PK

/ PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
 10 

6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X10

X11

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

FB X4

WD

ER
SIM0
TB
Ax 1703 peripheral bus (electrical)

SI1 (ETO)
PUSH TO
RELEASE

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6

SI0

SI3
NC
X2

24-60VDC

X13
16 Mbps

PWR
patch cable, length up to 3 m

Communication with other 1 ... 4


automation units

6,&$0

6,&$0
10

10
CM-0842

Ax 1703 peripheral bus (optical)


16 Mbps, optical fibre,
....
length up to 200 m
16
....

....

15
....
..........

....

1
....

max. 8 I/O-modules

PE-6411,12
PS-663x

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 15


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Connection of up to 16 peripheral elements via bus interface (electrical and optical
combined)

CP-6014 Note:
all in all up to 16 peripheral elements

LOC

RES
 10 

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CP Y
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
CO M
/ PK

/ PK

ER

PUSH TO
RE LEA SE
6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X11

X12
X10
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

FB X4

WD

ER
SIM0
TB

SI1 (ETO)
P US H TO

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
RELE ASE

SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC

24-60VDC
X2

X13
PWR
Ax 1703 peripheral bus (electrical)
16 Mbps
communication with other patch cable, length up to 3 m
automation units

1 ... 4 1 ... 4
6,&$0

6,&$0
10

10

CM-0843
CM-0842

....

16

Ax 1703 peripheral bus ....

(electrical)
16 Mbps
USB cable,
length up to 3 m ....

15
....
..........

....

1
....

Ax 1703 peripheral bus (optical) max. 8 I/O-modules


16 Mbps, optical fibre,
length up to 200 m PE-6410
PS-663x

....

16
....

....

15
....
..........

....

1
....

max. 8 I/O-modules

PE-6411,12
PS-663x

16 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
System Elements

A system element is a functional unit and consists of hardware and firmware. The firmware
gives the hardware the necessary functionality.

Detailed information on a system element can be found in the relevant data sheet (refer to
Literature).

Master Control Element

The master control element forms the heart of the SICAM TM automation module. Process in-
put and output is connected externally via peripheral elements. The communication interfaces
can be fitted directly onto the master control element.

RES
LOC
 10 

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X11
X10

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

FB X4

WD

ER
SIM0
TB

SI1 (ETO)
RELEASE
PUSH TO

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC

24-60VDC
X2

X13
PWR

Functions of the master control element


• Central coordinating element for all system services and all internal and overlapping con-
cepts
─ Time management and time synchronization via minute pulse, serial time signal
(DCF77/GPS-receiver), serial communication link, NTP server over LAN/WAN
─ Data Flow Control
─ Monitoring functions
─ Diagnostic functions
─ Archiving of events
─ Communication with the engineering system SICAM TOOLBOX II
─ Storage of application data and firmware on a flash card

• Communication with installed peripheral elements via the serial Ax 1703 peripheral bus
• Execution of parameterizable telecontrol functions
• Execution of programmable open-/closed-loop control functions
• Communication with other automation units via protocol elements installable on the master
control element (node function)

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 17


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
The master control element provides the open-/closed-loop functions and/or the parameteriz-
able telecontrol function, and the node function for the communication via serial interfaces and
LAN/WAN. Therefore, it also serves as a centrally coordinating element for all system func-
tions and all internal and integral concepts.

This architecture ensures

• a deterministic behavior of the open-/closed-loop control function with guaranteed reaction


times
• an autonomous behavior (for instance in the case of communication failure)
• the integration of the telecontrol functionality (spontaneous processing and spontaneous
communication) and the open-/closed-loop control functions (periodical processing and
periodical communication with the periphery) into one common automation device.

Product Overview

Type Designation Remarks


CP-6014/CPCX65 Processing & Communication required
Flash Card Flash Card required

Protocol Element

A protocol element is used for the exchange of data – and thereby for the transmission of
messages – over a communication interface to other SICAM RTUs automation units or to de-
vices of other manufacturers, as for instance control centre systems.

A fundamental characteristic of the protocol elements is the separation of protocol-bound


communication from application tasks of an automation unit:

• Each interface has its own protocol processor


─ communication has no impact on the application, and vice versa
─ each processor runs 1 communication protocol
─ various different protocols run on one and the same hardware

• Change of the communication protocol, for instance from serial to LAN, without retroactive
effect to the application tasks of an automation unit
• Each automation unit can be equipped with various protocols, this allows easy implemen-
tation of data nodes and frontends.

Tasks of the protocol elements


• Handling of specifical communication protocols
• Adaption of the internal message formats to the corresponding external message formats
• Adaption of system and adressing concepts of SICAM RTUs and the devices of other
manufacturers

Thereby it is distinguished between protocol elements with serial communication or with


LAN/WAN communication.

18 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Configuration
The hardware for the protocol elements is a communication interface on a Serial Interface
Module (SIM) that can be mounted – directly or cascaded (SIM on SIM) – on the master con-
trol element.

A SIM has up to 2 communication interfaces. On every interface provided by the SIM, a com-
munication protocol available for this interface can be loaded with the SICAM TOOLBOX II.

On a master control element, up to 4 communication interfaces can be used. This way, a mul-
titude of communication options is available, as for instance:

• 4 serial interfaces
• 3 serial interfaces and 1 Ethernet interface (LAN/WAN)
• 2 serial interfaces and 1 Profibus DP interface (master)
• 2 serial, 1 Ethernet interface (LAN) and 1 Ethernet interface (WAN)

The possible configuration variants can be found in the System Element Manual
CP-6014/CPCX65 (refer to Literature).

Product Overview

Type Designation
SM-x551/BPPA0 Standard protocol for point-to-point traffic optional
SM-x551/UMPMA0 Standard protocol for multi-point traffic (Master) optional
SM-x551/UMPSA0 Standard protocol for multi-point traffic (Slave) optional
SM-x551/SFBMA1 Standard protocol for field bus (Master) optional
SM-x551/SFBSA1 Standard protocol for field bus (Slave) optional
SM-x551/DIAMA0 Standard protocol for dial-up traffic (Master) optional
SM-x551/DIASA0 Standard protocol for dial-up traffic (Slave) optional
SM-x551/103MA0 Standard protocol for interfacing of protective devices (Master) optional
SM-2545/DPM00 Standard protocol for Profibus DP optional
SM-2558/ETA4 Standard protocol for Ethernet TCP/IP IEC 104 optional
SM-2558/ETA3 Standard protocol for Ethernet TCP/IP IEC 61850 optional
SM-2557/ETA2 Standard protocol for Ethernet TCP/IP IEC 104 optional
SM-2557/ET03 Standard protocol for Ethernet TCP/IP IEC 61850 optional

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 19


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Serial Communication

For serial communication are available as standard protocols:

• Point-to-point traffic
• Multi-point traffic, optionally with relay operation
• Dial-up traffic

Naturally, all standard protocols are fully based on the interoperable standard to
IEC 60870-5-101/103, including

• absolutely free addressing


• single object orientation
• time Synchronization
• integrated remote maintenance functions such as
─ remote diagnostics
─ remote parameter setting
─ online test functions

Yet, there is still a whole series of other available protocols such as

• counter interfacing according to IEC 61107


• interfacing of protective devices according to IEC 60870-5-103
• Modbus RTU standard protocol
• DNP 3.0

Additional information on interfacing to non-SICAM systems and third-party protocols (subject-


to-license protocols) is available on request.

LAN/WAN Communication

Today, modern automation systems are generally distributed and thus require networks to
connect the various components with one another. In its systems, Siemens has for many
years provided networks solutions, which link the various components with one another.

From the very beginning, great attention was paid to ensuring full integration as well as opti-
mum availability and operational reliability. As network technology continued to become ever
more refined, the product family SICAM RTUs as well has continuously been updated and up-
graded to reflect the latest state of the art, without neglecting the criteria of ensuring a long
system lifecycle and highest availability.

For the LAN/WAN communication, Ethernet TCP/IP accordeing to IEC 60870-5-104 or


IEC 61850 can be used, which again guarantees maximum interoperability.

If SICAM TM is used as a station control device, then the communication with the devices of
the bay level (bay control units, protective devices) can also be established according to
IEC 61850.

IEC 61850 is the standardized communication standard for substation automation which inter-
connects devices of the bay level and the station control level, based on Ethernet TCP/IP.

20 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Bus Interface Module

A bus interface module serves for the connection of peripheral elements with a master control
element. At each bus interface module – type dependent optical or electrical – up to
4 peripheral elements can be connected.

At a master control element, up to 4 bus interface modules can be connected via standard
patch cables.

Product Overview

Type Designation Remarks


CM-0842 Bus Interface Ax-PE 4x optical optional
CM-0843 Bus Interface Ax-PE 4x USB optional

Peripheral Element

A peripheral element serves for acquisition or output of process information and performs
process-oriented adaption, monitoring and processing of the process signals at each point
where the signals enter or leave an automation unit.

Processing is performed by

• hardware (e.g. filter, ADC, DAC)


• firmware (e.g. smoothing of measured values, time tagging)

The peripheral elements deliver via the Ax 1703 peripheral bus

• messages with process information


• periodical information
• messages with system information (e.g. diagnostic information)

and receive

• messages with process information


• periodical information
• messages with system information (e.g. parameters)

Peripheral elements are linked with the master control element via the Ax 1703 peripheral
bus. Up to 2 peripheral elements can be connected directly (via USB interfaces), up to
16 peripheral elements can be connected with usage of bus interface modules.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 21


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Structure of the peripheral element
A peripheral element consists of

• 1 power supply module


• 1 peripheral control module
• up to 8 I/O modules
or

• 1 power supply module


• 1 system element for direct transformer input

8 I/O modules max.

Peripheral control module

Power supply module

System element for direct transformer input


Power supply module

Power Supply Module

A power supply module ensures the supply for the peripheral element. There are 2 types with
enhanced electromagnetic compatibility available.

Product Overview

Type Designation Power


PS-6630 Power Supply Module 24-60 VDC (EMC+) 8.0 W
PS-6632 Power Supply Module 110-220 VDC (EMC+) 8.0 W

22 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Peripheral Control Module

The peripheral control module is linked with the master control element or with the bus inter-
face module by means of simple, standardized cable, thereby reducing the assembly effort
required for their connection to a minimum.

Functions of the peripheral control module


• Secured data exchange with the master control element
• Secured data exchange with the connected I/O modules via the SICAM RTUs peripheral
bus (TM bus)
• Monitoring of the connected I/O modules
• Preprocessing of the input and output signals

The communication between the I/O modules and the peripheral control module takes place
via the TM bus according to the master/slave method, the I/O modules being the slaves.

Product Overview

Type Designation Remarks


PE-6410/USIO66 Peripheral Controller (Ax-PE bus el) optional
PE-6411/USIO66 Peripheral Controller (1x Ax-PE bus opt) optional
PE-6412/USIO66 Peripheral Controller (2x Ax-PE bus opt) optional
PE-6410/TCIO66 Peripheral Controller for Turbine Controller (Ax-PE bus el) optional
PE-6411/TCIO66 Peripheral Controller for Turbine Controller (Ax-PE bus opt) optional
PE-6412/TCIO66 Peripheral Controller for TC (2xAx-PE bus opt) optional

I/O Modules

The I/O modules are added side by side to the peripheral control module. As soon as they en-
gage with one another, contact will be established automatically throughout the TM bus so
that no additional wiring is required. Even so, every single I/O module can still be exchanged
separately. The installation may be horizontally or vertically.

Removable terminals (I/O connectors) are used for the simple handling of modules when they
are to be mounted or exchanged. Since the terminals carry the wiring, no connections need to
be disconnected when devices are exchanged.

How many I/O modules may actually be used per peripheral element and in what order they
can be used, is described in the respective data sheets.

Functions of the I/O modules


• Acquisition and output of binary and analog process signals
• Secured data exchange with the peripheral control element via the TM bus

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 23


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Product Overview

Type Designation Remarks


DI-6100 Binary Input 2x8, 24-60 VDC optional
DI-6101 Binary Input 2x8, 110/220 VDC optional
DI-6102 Binary Input 2x8, 24-60 VDC 1ms optional
DI-6103 Binary Input 2x8, 110/220 VDC 1ms optional
DI-6104 Binary Input 2x8, 220VDC optional
DO-6200 Binary Output Transistor 2x8, 24-60 VDC optional
DO-6212 Binary Output Relays 8x 24-220 VDC/230 VAC optional
DO-6220 Command Output Base Module optional
DO-6221 Command Output Base Module with Measurement optional
DO-6230 Command Output Relay Module optional
AI-6300 Analog Input 2x2 ±20 mA/±10 V optional
AI-6307 Analog Input 2x2 ±5mA optional
AI-6308 Analog Input 2x2 ±2mA/±10V optional
AI-6310 Analog Input 2x2 Pt100/Ni100 optional
AO-6380 Analog Output 4x ±20 mA/±10 mA/±10 V optional
TE-6420 Speed Measurement 2x2 5 VDC/24 VDC/NAMUR optional
TE-6430 Counting Pulse Input 2x 24…60 VDC optional
TE-6450 Position Acquisition 2x2 SSI/RS-422 optional

System Elements for Direct Transformer Connection

SICAM TM provides additional TM modules for direct transformer input. These system ele-
ments do not require a peripheral control module.

Product Overview

Type Designation Remarks


AI-6303/TIPS05 Direct Transformer Input (4x220 V,3x6 A) optional
AI-6304/TIPS05 Direct Transformer Input (4x220 V,3x6 A) optional

24 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Ax 1703 Peripheral Bus

The Ax 1703 peripheral bus permits the secured (hamming distance 4), serial in-system
communication between the master control element and the peripheral elements.

The Ax 1703 peripheral bus may be accessible via external connectors (optical or electrical).

Serial communication also makes it possible to locally detach individual or all peripheral ele-
ments via optical links by up to 200 m without sacrificing any of the full system functionality.
Where electric links are used, standardized USB cables up to a maximum length of 3 m are
used.

The communication at the Ax 1703 peripheral bus takes place according to the master/slave
method, the peripheral elements being the slave and the master control element the master.

Master control element


RES
LOC

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
 10 

6,&$0

X15

X16
X14
X5
X11
X10

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
SIM0

FB
TB

SI1 (ETO)
RELEASE

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
PUSH TO

SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6
SI0

SI3
NC
X2

24-60VDC

X13
PWR

Ax 1703 peripheral bus

TM bus

Peripheral control module


(electrical or optical)

process

Each peripheral element represents, regardless of its

• function
• data volume
• processing

one of up to 16 possible slave participants at the Ax 1703 peripheral bus.

Addressing of the bus participants is handled for all peripheral elements via a logical periph-
eral board address (PBA) that can be set on the peripheral control module.

The interfaces between the system elements are memories whose contents are transmitted
periodically (every 10 ms) by the Ax 1703 peripheral bus. It is defined for each system ele-
ment which and how much information is transmitted.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 25


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Via the Ax 1703 peripheral bus, 2 logical channels are implemented:

• Periodical channel for the function package "Automation".


The periodical channel permits the data exchange between the master control element
and the peripheral elements in the cycle of the open-/closed-loop control function in the mas-
ter control element. This way, non-linearized and conditioned (adapted) values are sup-
plied to the input module of the open-/closed-loop control function and passed on by the
open-/closed-loop control function to the output modules.

• Spontaneous channel for the function package "Telecontrol".

The spontaneous channel permits the data exchange between the master control element
and the peripheral elements. This way, the messages with process information and the mes-
sages with system information are transmitted in the acknowledged mode in a spontaneous
time window within the acquisition and output grid.

Firmware Architecture

The specific firmwares for the individual system elements are stored within the
SICAM TOOLBOX II. Firmware updates can be loaded, if necessary, easily into the respective
system elements by means of the firmware loader of the SICAM TOOLBOX II.

TOOLBOX II

CPCX65

Telecontrol Automation
(spontaneous) (periodical)

Open-/closed-loop
Protocol control function

Communication

Application
programm
Telecontrol

Internal
interface

communication

USIO66 (TCIO66)

Peripheral functions Peripheral functions

26 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Engineering

The costs for the creation and maintenance of automation technology plants are determined
to an increasing degree by the costs for the creation and updating of the engineering data.
The engineering data therefore represent major capital goods of the company, the creation
and updating of which by means of a high-quality engineering system results in a considerable
reduction of the indirect costs.

For this reason, Siemens places great importance on the engineering systems in its product
range, and with the SICAM TOOLBOX II, thus consequently continues its policy of always
providing high-quality, ergonomic products based on innovative system technology, also in the
field of engineering systems.

The high demands on the easy and intuitive operability as well as on the overall ergonomics of
an engineering system are satisfied by the SICAM TOOLBOX II through an operating and dis-
play technology based on the latest state of technology.

• Fully graphical user interface with easy operation and uniform "Look and Feel" (Window
technology, Menus, Icons, Help System)

as well as through forward-looking conception

• Industrial standard database system ORACLE TM


• Network support (SICAM TOOLBOX II Peer Server)
• Client/Server architecture
• Standard operating systems (Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP)
• Standard hardware (Personal Computer)

The SICAM TOOLBOX II constitutes an integrated overall tool


• All engineering data are stored, managed and processed – on the same hardware plat-
form in a central database – by the same tool; a transfer of data between devices and
tools is not necessary.
• Besides the entire SICAM RTUs product line, SICAM 230 is also configured by means of
the SICAM TOOLBOX II.
• If an exchange of data with devices or systems of other manufacturers should be neces-
sary, then there is a specific data interface for this available that is simple to operate, the
source data management.

During the entire lifecycle of the plant, the SICAM TOOLBOX II comprehensively supports all
phases of the plant configuration and maintenance for the entire SICAM RTUs system family.
The engineering with the SICAM TOOLBOX II therefore goes far beyond conventional device
parameterization and comprises the following areas:

• Data acquisition, data modeling


• Parameter setting, test and diagnostic
• Documentation
• Backup and archiving
• Maintenance

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 27


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Data Acquisition, Data Modeling

The plant is at the center of the configuration procedure:

Feeders Plant OPM II View

For same type primary technology units and resources (objects), types can be modeled, which
contain the characteristics of the objects. During engineering, such objects can be created
identically many times very easily (one speaks of instantiation). As a result considerable sav-
ings can be achieved.

The advantages outweigh not only with the creation but also with the updating of the data for
expansions and with consistent change of all same-type objects as well as with the achievable
quality with regard to consistency of the engineering data.

User Programs for the Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function

User programs for the open-/closed-loop control function are created according to IEC 61131-3
using CAEx plus, a tool of the SICAM TOOLBOX II. This standard is generally accepted in the
market and is recognized. Engineering according to this standard generally only requires short
training periods.

Thereby versatile applications can be easily realized:

• Logical links
• Sum commands, sum alarms
• Limit monitoring
• Bay- and station-related interlocks
• Synchronous comparison with analog of busbar
• Switchover automation, switching sequences (busbars, transformers etc.)
• Step-by-step controls
• Closed loop control (tap changer controller, turbine governor, etc.)

Test Functions

There are various test function available, both offline as well as online. Consequently, test and
commissioning periods can be kept very short.

28 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Function chart editor
CAEx plus

Signal list display

Test function Oscilloscope

Online test

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 29


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Function Packages

Overview

Due to the different requirements in terms of functionality, also different data flow concepts are
produced.

The implementation of freely definable open-/closed-loop control functions ("Automation")


calls for a deterministic guaranteed reaction time. This is achieved by using the consistently
periodic concept with regard to data acquisition, execution of functions, and data transfer, re-
gardless of the number of changing signals.

For telecontrol tasks and the distribution of user data in networked plants ("Telecontrol"), the
use of spontaneous transmission proves advantageous for optimizing the utilization of the in
many cases limited communication bandwidth. This helps avoid constant burdening of the
data sinks with unnecessary data.

While in classical programmable controller devices, the design is primarily adapted for the
open-/closed-loop control functions - that is, for a periodical traffic - classical telecontrol de-
vices in turn only prove advantageous in spontaneous data exchange. By way of the integra-
tion of both functional packages in one system, both requirements are accomplished equally
well, for high-load cases they can even be mutually prioritized.
RES
LOC

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK

ER

P USH TO
RELEA SE
 10 

6,&$0

X15

X16

control
X14

preprocessing
X5

acqusition
X11
X10

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
SIM0

FB
TB

SI1 (ETO)
RELEA SE
P USH TO

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6

postprocessing
SI0

SI3

output
NC
X2

24-60VDC

communication
X13
PWR

function

periodical communication open-/closed loop control function (periodical)


spontaneous communication telecontrol function (spontaneous)

30 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Functional Packages – Architecture

Process periphery

Peripheral element

I/O I/O I/O I/O


module module module module

TM bus TM bus

Peripheral control element Peripheral control element

Ax PE bus

Master control element

periodical information
Open-/closed loop
control function
Messages

Internal distribution for messages with process information

Automatic data flow routing System services


Data storage

Communication function

Priority control

Supplementary modules bus

Protocol element

Protocol Protocol

Transmission link

Telecontrol Automation Message periodical information

A detailed description of the function packages can be found in the document SICAM RTUs
Common Functions System and Basic System Elements.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 31


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Telecontrol

The function package Telecontrol includes the following functions:

• Process input and output on peripheral elements


• Communication with other automation units
─ Automatic data flow routing
─ Data storage
─ Priority control

• Protocol elements
• Redundant communication routes
• Communication within the automation unit
• Protocol element control and return information
• Decentralized archive

Process Input and Output on Peripheral Elements

• Acquisition of the process data


• Processing, generation and transfer of messages with process information via the Ax 1703
peripheral bus
• Time tag with 1 ms or 10 ms resolution, dependent on the respective I/O module
• Reception of messages with process information via the Ax 1703 peripheral bus
• Processing and output of the process data

Communication with Oher Automation Units

The communication function controls the transmission of messages via protocol elements to
other automation units or control systems.

A protocol element is based on a serial interface module (SIM) that can be installed on a basic
system element for serial, LAN/WAN and field bus communication. It supports standard proto-
cols according to the standards IEC 60870-5-101/103/104 and a large number of protocols for
the communication with third-party systems.

The communication function differentiates between transmission and receive direction.

Communication function in transmit direction


The messages to be transmitted are learned through the automatic data flow routing and
stored in the data storage. The transfer of the messages from the data storage to the protocol
elements takes place via a priority controller in order to optimally utilize the transmission route.

• Automatic data flow routing


• Data storage
• Priority control

32 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Communication function in receive direction
• Messages with process information are distributed to all functions within the automation unit.
• Messages with system information are either processed directly (e.g. station interrogation) or
distributed further based on their destination address (CASDU) (e.g. messages for remote
maintenance).

Automatic Data Flow Routing

For the automatic data flow routing, a routing of individual process information items is not
necessary. Simply only the direction (monitor direction, control direction, both directions), in
which the messages are to be transmitted, is to be parameterized.

The type identification of each message provides information about the class (refer to Mes-
sages with Process Information) to which a message belongs and with which methods it is to
be distributed:

• Messages with process information in monitor direction


─ In simple applications, the messages are distributed via an entry in the topology.
─ For more complex applications, the messages can be distributed selectively with the
help of the data flow filter.
For each communication interface, pass-through filters or blocking filters can be set.
Since wildcards can also be used for all address attributes of the message, it is possi-
ble to control the data flow very specifically with simple means.

• Messages with process information in control direction


─ The messages are distributed to the destinations determined by their CASDU over in-
terfaces that are defined in the topology. The CASDU is interpreted as destination ad-
dress.

Data Storage

Messages that are intended for transmission over communication interfaces, are in principle
stored chronologically in rings. There is a process image both before and after a ring. The ar-
rangement, consisting of one ring and two process images, is called a priority channel (priority
channels for transparent data do not have any process images).

Depending on the data communication mode of the protocol element over which the commu-
nication is processed, priority channels are provided for every priority of the messages to be
transmitted and for every station that can be reached via the protocol element:

• Data communication mode "Multi Point" (e.g. multi-point traffic, LAN)


One priority channel for every transmission priority, for every station and for every protocol
element
• Data communication mode "Single Point"
One priority channel for every transmission priority and for every protocol element

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 33


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
With regard to the data that they transport, priority channels are distinguished as follows:

• Time synchronization
• System information
• Process information in control direction
• Process information in monitor direction Priority HIGH with class 1 data
• Process information in monitor direction Priority MEDIUM with class 2 data
• Process information in monitor direction Priority LOW with class 2 data
• Transparent information

Functions for priority channels:

• State compression for measured values (can be set using parameters)


Specifically reduces the flood of messages, that can continuously generate fluctuating
measured values
• Behavior with a priority channel overload
• Behavior during a communication failure (transmit direction)
• Monitoring of the dwell time (parameter-settable) of messages with process information in con-
trol direction
Messages that are stored too long in the priority channel are discarded
• Answering of station interrogations
• Behavior during failure of peripheral elements, communication interfaces etc.
• Blocking (series of information elements)

Priority Control

The priority controller has the task of selecting messages recorded in the data memories in-
dependently and individually for each interface and station and to direct the transmission of
the messages via the protocol elements in accordance with their priority. This ensures, that
with several information items queued at the same time, the higher-priority, highly important
information is transmitted first.

The prioritization, however, does not represent an absolute priority status, but rather a meas-
ure for the distribution of the channel capacity. This ensures, that even with continuously
available higher-priority data, those of lower priority can also be transmitted.

Communication within the Automation Unit

Within an automation unit, the function package Telecontrol communicates with the function
package Automation via its Telecontrol Interface. The functions are described there.

34 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Protocol Element Control and Return Information

This function is used for the user-specific influencing of the functions of the protocol elements.
The main application lies with protocol elements with multi point data communication mode
and especially for dial-up traffic configurations.

This function contains two separate independent parts:

• Protocol element control


─ test if stations are reachable
─ suppression of errors with intentionally switched-off stations

• Protocol element return information


─ cost control of telephone charges
─ cost-efficient utilization of the telephone line (example: command initiation only then,
when a connection has already been established)

Decentralized Archive

During a communication failure, in the master control element data are stored in the decentral-
ized archive (DEAR). After the communication fault has been rectified, the control system can
read out the decentralized archive of the master control element. Through this function, a pos-
sible loss of data is prevented.

Features of DEAR:

• Reconstruction of all process-relevant data


• Transmission of the archive to the control system
─ Automatic initiation by the control system after communication fault
─ File transfer acc. to IEC 60870-5-101
• Data saving
─ Datapoint-specific (parameter-settable)
─ Number of files, memory size parameter-settable
─ Binary information, integrated totals: spontaneous
─ Measured values: definable cycle
─ Non-volatile on flash card
• Configuration acc. to IEC 60870-5-101/104 (point-to-point, multi-point traffic, dial-up traffic,
Ethernet), also multi-hierarchical configurations possible
• SICAM 230 or third-party control system possible
• Reading of the archive possible via webbrowser or via the SICAM TOOLBOX II
• Front-end: SICAM AK, optionally redundant

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 35


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Automation

The function package Automation includes the following functions:

• Process input and –output on peripheral elements


• Telecontrol functions
─ Treatment for commands according to IEC 60870-5-101/104
─ Change monitoring and generation of messages with time tag
• Open-/closed-loop control function

Process Input and Output on Peripheral Elements

• Acquisition of the process data on the peripheral elements


• Processing, periodical transfer of the process information to the open-/closed-loop control
function
• Periodical acceptance of process information from the open-/closed-loop control function
• Processing and output of the process data

The detailed description of these functions can be found in the document SICAM RTUs Com-
mon Functions Peripheral Elements according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 (refer to Literature).

Open-/Closed-Loop Control Function

The open-/closed-loop control function is used for the management of automation tasks with the
help of an application program.

The creation of the application program is carried out by the SICAM TOOLBOX II with the tool
CAEx plus predominantly in function diagram technology according to IEC 61131-3.

The application program processes process information (so-called signals) from the peripheral
elements connected to the basic system element and / or from other system elements in the
automation network of the specific process-technical plant.

Process images form the interface of the application program to the outside world. We distin-
guish between input process images and output process images.

36 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
The exchange of the process information can take place in two ways:

• Transmission of periodical information from and to the peripheral elements connected to


the basic system element via the Ax 1703 peripheral bus (Process Input and Output On
Peripheral Elements)
• Transmission of spontaneous information objects from and to functions or peripheral ele-
ments within the automation unit, other open-/closed-loop control functions and other
automation units or control systems with the help of the telecontrol function (Transfer of
Messages with Process Information and Change Monitoring and Generation of Messages
with Time Tag)

The open-/closed-loop control function manages the application programs in 3 tasks running pe-
riodically:

• "Fast Task"
• "Task"
• „Slow Task“

The open-/closed-loop control function supports 32 programs (type instances) per task. In total,
64 programs are possible over all 3 tasks.

By means of assignment of a program to a task, fast controls can be optimally combined with
slower background processings.

The management of these three periodical tasks (Task Management) corresponds with the
standard IEC 61131-3. Spontaneous tasks are not supported.

Variables, signals (input process images for spontaneous information objects) and function
blocks can be saved non-volatile. That means, that after a power failure these variables and
signals are immediately available again with their values before the power failure.

Telecontrol Interface

Transfer of Messages with Process Information

Reception of messages with process information and transfer to the open-/closed-loop control
function for the purpose of further processing.

Messages with process information in monitor direction:

• Single-point information
• Double-point information
• Step position information
• Measured values
• Integrated totals
• Bitstring of 32 bit

Messages with process information in control direction:

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 37


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
• Single commands
• Double commands
• Regulating step commands
• Setpoint commands
• Bitstring of 32 bit

Treatment for commands according to IEC 60870-5-101/104


The treatment for commands serves for the check of the spontaneous information objects to
be processed with the help of the open-/closed loop control function and transmission of the con-
firmation for:

• Pulse commands (single commands, double commands, regulating step commands)


• Setpoint values (setpoint command)
• Bitstring of 32 bit

The data transfer of the spontaneous information objects to the application program of the
open-/closed-loop control function for further processing is dependent on the result of the
checks.

The activation of the element or function to be controlled is the task of the application program
of the open-/closed-loop control function.

For the proper operation of this function, information is required by the application program of
the open-/closed-loop control function (e.g. from an interlocking logic) for the choice of a posi-
tive or negative confirmation.

The treatment for commands can be activated individually for each command via a parameter.

The treatment for pulse command comprises the following processing functions:

• Prepare command output procedure


─ formal check
─ retry suppression
─ 1-out-of-n check
─ direct command or
select and execute command
─ control location check
─ command locking
─ system-element overlapping 1-out-of-n check

• Initiate command output procedure


─ command to application program

• Monitor pulse duration (only pulse commands)


─ command output time
─ return information monitoring

• Terminate command output procedure

38 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Change Monitoring and Generation of Messages With Time Tag

For the generation of messages with process information, the signals in the output process
images that are assigned to an element of a spontaneous information object, are monitored
for change.

The change monitoring takes place in a grid of the cycle time of each task, in which the signal
is assigned to a spontaneous information object.

On a change of the state in a corresponding element of the spontaneous information object,


the generation of the message is initiated.

Depending on the type of signal to be monitored, different methods are applied:

• Change of the state (positive edge, positive and negative edge)


• Change of the value (according to the rules of the additive threshold value procedure)

If a spontaneous information object has been activated for transmission due to a change, a
message with process information is generated. The time tag represents either the current time
synchronous with the cycle (resolution 10 ms or multiples of 10 ms) or the time information
from an assigned spontaneous information object.

Additive threshold value procedure


The additive threshold value procedure prevents an unnecessary loading of the transmission
links with insignificant changes of the corresponding signal and acts only on the basic data of
the spontaneous information objects with measured values.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 39


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Task Management

The open-/closed-loop control function manages the application programs in 3 tasks running pe-
riodically:

• "Fast Task"
• "Task"
• "Slow Task"

Coordination of the sequences of a task


• Periodical start in the selected cycle
• Input handling
• Program processing
• Output handling
• Online Test
• Real time archive

Coordination of the three tasks with each other


• "Fast Task" runs without interruption and with constant running time
• "Task" and "Slow Task" can be interrupted by higher-priority functions

Cycle time
• Within the cycle time, all programs assigned to a task (type instances) must process the
input handling and the output handling for this task
• The cycle time can be set in the tool CAEx plus for each task.
• The cycle times of the three tasks must be different and ascending from the "Fast Task" to
the "Slow Task".

Watchdog timer
This function monitors the proper sequence of each task within its set cycle time. If a task is
not finished with its input handling, program processing and its output handling within this
time, the next cycle for this task is omitted and a time-out is signaled.

With serious time-outs, for example due to a malfunction, the reliability of the application pro-
gram becomes questionable. A time scale can be defined for such cases, the exceeding of
which leads to an error message and a controlled shutdown of parts or the entire application
program as well as all peripheral elements connected.

40 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Loading the Application Program

Initial loading
The initial loading of an application program is always associated with a startup.

Loading of changes (reload)


Frequently, in the test and commissioning phase but also with the remedy of faults, changes
must be carried out. Most such changes (error rectifications, expansions) to the application
program can be loaded without interruption to operation. Far-reaching changes can necessi-
tate a startup of the basic system element and consequently an interruption to operation.

In the case of a loading operation that does not necessitate any interruption to operation, all
tasks of the open-/closed-loop control function continue to run unaffected. After successful load-
ing, a switchover to the newly loaded application program takes place synchronous with the
cycle.

Examples of changes that do not necessitate any interruption to operation:

• If after change, the function corresponds completely with that before change, in other
words a change has been performed that is not noticeable from "outside"
• If only new functional parts were added, that do not affect those that already existed
• If parameters of a controller are adapted

Fundamentally however, the fault-free operation and consequently the availability of every
control or controller depends on the quality of the program – in other words the measure of
how free they are of formal and logical errors. The loading of error-burdened changes can al-
ways lead to interruptions to operation.

Online Test

The entire functionality of the online test applies to

• the SICAM TOOLBOX II tool "CAEx plus Online Test" and


• the online test function of the open-/closed-loop control function of the automation unit

While in the tool "CAEx plus Online Test", all functions of the man-machine-interface can be
found, the open-/closed-loop control function provides functions for the execution of the operator
inputs.

If for example a value is to be displayed, then the selection of the value and its display takes
place in the tool "CAEx plus Online Test". For this purpose, the open-/closed-loop control func-
tion is given the task of reading out the selected value and transmit it to the
SICAM TOOLBOX II.

In the following, those functions are listed that the online test function of the open-/closed-loop
control function provides.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 41


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Display and setting of variables and signals
• Display of variables and signals
• Single setting of variables (single forcing)
The value of a variable can change again at any time after setting, due to the function of
the program
• Permanent setting of variables and signals (permanent forcing)
In order to be able to set variables and signals permanently, a special element ("force
marker") is set in the function diagram. This element contains the set value and a switch.
Depending on the position of the switch, the set value and or that value is transferred, that
the source that normally supplies the variable or the signal, is delivered.

Blocking and enabling of messages with process information and periodical informa-
tion
The copy operation in the input-side or from the output-side process images of

• Messages with process information


• Periodical information

can be blocked and enabled. This can take place with the following granularity:

• Per message
• All messages
• Per periodical information
• Each peripheral element

Changing the execution status of the open-/closed-loop control function


• Perform cold start or warm start of the resource
• Start and stop controller
• Perform cold start or warm start of a task
• Task halt and continue
• Program halt and continue

Test means
The available test means are:

(a) Halting of the execution due to a trigger condition ("Breakpoint")


(b) Execution of a task in cycle steps
(c) Controlling of the recording of the cyclic archive "Real Time Archive"

For each of the functions (a) and (c) a trigger condition is defined in the tool "CAEx plus
Online Test". A trigger conditions consists of up to conditions. The conditions of a trigger con-
dition are combined equal-ranking with AND or OR.

A condition compares a variable with a constant value to be specified:

Variable of the Type Condition <operator>


BOOL variable <operator> value = <>
INT or REAL variable <operator> value < = <> >

42 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
The trigger condition is assigned to either a task or the resource (= all tasks), depending on
what one wishes to achieve:

• The function Halt the execution due to a trigger condition halts the task or resource, if
the trigger condition is satisfied
• The function Real Time Archive switches over from Recording the Pre-History to Re-
cording the Post-History, if the trigger condition is satisfied

The trigger condition is evaluated at the end of that task, to which it has been assigned; or at
the end of every task, if it has been assigned to the resource.

Real time archive


The real time archive of the open-/closed-loop control function records variables (and signals) af-
ter every cycle, in order to make then available for display with the oscilloscope function of the
SICAM TOOLBOX II tool "CAEx plus Online Test". Which variables are to be recorded is de-
fined in the "CAEx plus Online Test". The recording can be controlled in such a way, that pre-
and post-history are available for a post-mortem analysis.

For the recording of the variables there is a memory of 100,000 bytes available for each re-
source.

The recording can be terminated with

• An operator input in "CAEx plus Online Test"


The recording is terminated, the entire memory is available as pre-history.
• A definable Trigger condition
The real time archive switches from Recording the Pre-History to Recording the Post-
History and continues to record until the memory is full. The division of the memory into
pre- and post-history can be defined.

Which variables are to be recorded and at which periodicity, is determined in the "CAEx plus
Online Test". The periodicity is determined by assigning the recording to a task. From its cycle
time and the setting of how many cycles are to be omitted between the recordings, the re-
cording times are produced and consequently the resolution of the display in the oscilloscope
function:

Resolution[ms] = cycle time[ms] of the selected task * (number of cycles to be omitted +1)

The time period for the pre- and post-history is dependent on the number of variables to be
recorded (# of Var) and the aforementioned resolution:

Period[ms] = (100000 * resolution[ms]) / (# of Var BOOL) + 2*(# of Var INT) + 4*(# of Var REAL)

Display status information


For each task the following information items are made available to the SICAM TOOLBOX II
on request:

• The parameterized cycle time


• The current run time (in 10 µs)
• The maximum run time (in 10 µs)
• The number of time-outs that the system has registered

During the course of the interrogation, the current run time and the number of time-outs can
be optionally reset.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 43


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
System Services

System Services is a function package, that provides general functions and basic services in
an automation unit, that other function packages require:

• Communication with the Engineering System


• Data Flow Control
• Addressing
• Time Management
• General Interrogation
• Self Test
• Failure
• Diagnosis and Signaling
• Autonomy

Communication with the Engineering System


(SICAM TOOLBOX II)

For the communication between the SICAM TOOLBOX II and the automation unit, in two re-
spects there are different variants:

• Physical connection of the SICAM TOOLBOX II with an automation unit


─ direct local via the serial Toolbox interface (TB) on the master control element
─ remote
− serial via modems
− Ethernet (TCP/IP) and Terminal Server (serial)
− Ethernet (TCP/IP)

• Logical connection of the SICAM TOOLBOX II with that automation unit, that is the subject
of the engineering task:
─ Local automation unit
(that is that one, to which the physical connection exists, regardless in which of the
above mentioned forms)
─ Remote automation unit
(automation unit that can be reached via the local automation unit; consistent remote
communication according to IEC 60870-5-101 or -104 is required)

With the exception of the very first initialization procedures, all tasks are possible in each of
the above mentioned variants, including for example:

• Parameter setting
• Diagnostic
• Test (for example online test of an application program of the open-/closed-loop control
function)
• Load firmware, load parameters

44 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Data Flow Control

The data flow control is that system function which co-ordinates the communication of mes-
sages within the automation unit.

This function supports:

• Messages with Process Information


• Messages with System Information

For the tracking of messages within an automation unit the following test functions are avail-
able:

• Data Flow Test


• Message Simulation

Messages with Process Information

IEC 60870-5 distinguishes between the following classes of messages. The type identification
of each message provides information about the class to which a message belongs and with
which methods it is to be distributed:

• Messages with process information in monitor direction


─ binary information, measured values, integrated totals and bit patterns

• Messages with process information in control direction


─ commands, setpoint values and bit patterns

The distribution of messages with process information takes place by way of routing (telecontrol)
or assignment (open- / closed-loop control function) based on the message address and type
identification in the message.

Messages with process information, that are to be transmitted to other automation units via pro-
tocol elements, are distributed with the help of the function Automatic Data Flow Routing.

For messages with process information that are to reach sinks within the automation unit - such
as for instance peripheral elements or the open-/closed-loop control function - the routing infor-
mation or assignments are automatically derived from parameters from OPM-inputs (datapoint
address).

Predominantly used are message formats according to IEC 60870-5-101 / 104 in the public
range with the exception of user data containers. Therefore, for their part the messages are
compatible and interoperable with many other manufacturers.

Within the SICAM RTUs family, when using standard protocols the messages are compatible
with the system families Ax 1703 (AK 1703, AM 1703, AMC 1703, BC 1703) and SICAM
RTUs (SICAM AK, SICAM TM, SICAM BC).

Messages with process information have a 5-stage message address. Message addresses must
be parameterized at the sources, such as for instance peripheral elements or the open-/closed-
loop control function.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 45


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Addressing of the Process Information

Each data point is addressed in the automation network according to IEC 60870-5-101/104 by
means of:

CASDU 1………Common address of the ASDU, octet 1


CASDU 2………Common address of the ASDU, octet 2
IOA 1……………Information object address, octet 1
IOA 2……………Information object address, octet 2
IOA 3……………Information object address, octet 3

Messages with process information in monitor direction are source-addressed, messages with proc-
ess information in control direction are destination-addressed.

Addressing of Automation Units and System Elements

Addressing of Automation Units

An automation unit is addressed by means of:

• Region number (0…249) and


• Component number (0…255)

Within a system-technical plant each automation unit must be unambiguously addressed.


Therefore a system-technical plant may consist of up to 64.000 automation units.

Addressing of System Elements

Within an automation unit, system elements are addressed by means of numbers for:

• Basic system elements


• Peripheral elements
• Protocol elements

46 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Time Management

It is an integral element of the time management, that each automation unit and each system
element, that has a time-dependent function to fulfill, can manage a clock with corresponding
accuracy and resolution. Each automation unit has a central clock, the so-called time server.

Clock

In error-free operation the clocks are set once with the time setting operation and then run
completely autonomous without any further time setting mechanisms. Afterwards the time syn-
chronization ensures, that all time servers in all automation units run synchronously.

All clocks within an automation unit are operated and synchronized by a central 10 ms clock
pulse, that is generated by the time server of the automation unit with an accuracy of < 1 ms.

With power-up, all clocks begin to run unsynchronized with the date/time 2001-01-01
00:00:00.000. Therefore, until the first time setting they have only a relative time, that is
flagged with "invalid".

During a reset the time server keeps running, thereby all clocks remain synchronous.

Time Setting and Time Synchronization

There are many options available for time setting and time synchronization:

• Direct serial connection of a DCF77 or a GPS time signal receiver


• Time setting over the communication (serial, LAN) from a master station, time synchroni-
zation by means of minute pulse of the GPS- or DCF77-receiver
• Time setting and time synchronization over a serial communication
• Time setting and time synchronization over LAN (Ethernet TCP/IP-NTP)

The system itself can provide further automation units with time over communication lines,
and can perform the time synchronization with serial standard protocols.

If the external time synchronization fails, the system continues to operate with an accuracy of
3.5 ppm, based on the internal clock (free run).

Automatic Time Tag (Time Stamp)

At every point in the system where messages with process information are generated, these
messages can be provided with a time tag. Resolution and accuracy of the time tag are de-
pendent on

• the function that generates the time tag


• the system element in which this takes place.

The transfer of the data with standard protocols takes place with 7 octet time (in other words
including date, with 1ms resolution) and priority-controlled.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 47


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
General Interrogation

On startup and after faults in the system (communication faults, FIFO overflows), the partici-
pating automation units ensure, that the operation is resumed automatically in a coordinated
manner.

This means, that the internal and external communication connections are set up (again). Un-
der consideration of a multi-hierarchical network, all affected data and relevant system infor-
mation are transmitted throughout the system from their sources though to their sinks for the
purpose of updating the process images. This takes place with the initiation of a general inter-
rogation to the corresponding part of the automation network, in which the error occurred.

Self Test

The self-test is used for the protection against inadmissible operating states. Through a series
of monitoring operations, defects of the hardware used or faulty behavior of the firmware are
detected.

Depending on which test is concerned, a test is performed:

• During startup and/or


• Continuously during operation

Monitoring of Hardware and Firmware

Monitoring detects Note


Watchdog monitoring • Defect of the CPU used
• Faulty behavior of the firmware
IDLE monitoring • Faulty behavior of the firmware or application
program with endless loops
• Excessively long firmware run times etc
Code memory monitoring • Defect of the storage medium used (Flash- Checksum
PROM or flash card)
• Undetected transmission errors when loading
the program code
Parameter memory moni- • Defect of the storage medium used (Flash- Checksum
toring PROM or flash card)
• Undetected transmission errors when loading
the parameters
Firmware self-monitoring • Incorrect call parameters with system services
and programming errors
Shadow RAM • Defect of the storage medium used (DRAM)
• Defect of the DRAM refresh logic implemented
RAM test with addressing • Defect of the storage medium used (DRAM)
errors check • Defect of the READ/WRITE equipment
• Defect of the RAM in a defined area
• Defect of the DRAM refresh logic implemented
• Short or interruptions on the data and address
bus

48 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Monitoring detects Note
Monitoring forbidden • Firmware errors CPU exception
memory access handling
Monitoring forbidden I/O • Firmware errors when accessing the I/O ad- CPU exception
access dress range handling
• Hardware errors
Illegal Opcode • Firmware errors with e.g. jump operations CPU exception
• Defect of the storage medium used (Flash- handling
PROM)
• Defect of the READ equipment
• Short or interruptions on the data and address
bus
Stack Overflow • Firmware errors • CPU exception
handling
• Firmware

Monitoring the Data Integrity

Monitoring detects Note


Messages with sponta- • Defect of the storage medium used (FIFO) Checksum
neous information objects • Internal communication errors
on internal interfaces
Messages with periodical • Communication errors on the Ax 1703 periph- • Hamming dis-
information on the eral bus tance 4
Ax 1703 peripheral bus • Horzontal and
vertical parity

Failure

The system concept of failure management realized in SICAM RTUs ensures the individual
marking of the data of failed parts of the system and the correct system and process behavior
in the event of a fault.

For this the failure management provides:

• A system function for the failure detection (for instance for modules/system elements,
communication)
• Derived from this the marking of the data points affected by the failure in the spontaneous
communication with all data sinks such as
─ other automation units
─ the open-/closed-loop control function
─ the peripheral elements

• Periodical information that inform the open-/closed-loop control function which peripheral
elements - and thereby which periodical information - are affected by the failure
• A parameter-settable behavior of peripheral elements with output function.

Consequently, for all data sinks (peripheral outputs, open-/closed-loop control function, control
system) the state is available for every process information and - depending on requirements
and functionality - corresponding measures can be initiated.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 49


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Diagnosis and Signaling

The diagnostic function manages the system states and error information detected by the in-
dividual functions and their monitoring operations.

It enables the display of process states, the internal system and fault information on the front
panel of the modules and the local or remote diagnostic by means of the SICAM TOOLBOX II.

Each system element delivers its detected system- and error states to the master control ele-
ment with supplementary information (for instance cause of error, originator description).
There they are saved in tables as current and stored information. These information items can
be read out and displayed in detail locally or remotely with the help of the
SICAM TOOLBOX II. The stored information can be acknowledged and can thus be updated
again. For the purpose of better clarity, these tables are divided into classes:

A sum information about the detailed errors is transmitted from each automation unit via the
communication to the next automation units and is additionally managed there.

A SICAM TM provides up to 2 relay outputs – each with normally open and normally closed
contact – for signaling.

Important detail or sum information is displayed by means of LEDs on the front panels of the
system elements.

Autonomy

Autonomy means, that an autonomous basic system element and its supplementary system
elements (protocol and peripheral elements) continue to function unaffected during the failure
of the master control unit. This behavior can be set for the basic system element by means of
a parameter.

On failure of the master control unit, data points are flagged with "not topical", which

• are acquired by other system elements in the automation unit and not over the particular
peripheral or protocol elements
• are acquired by other automation units that are not connected over the particular protocol
elements.

After startup of the master control unit, the autonomous basic system element is synchronized
without interruption to operation. Due to a general interrogation, the data points flagged with
“not topical” on failure of the master control unit are updated.

50 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Compatibility

Compatibility with the Existing SICAM RTUs Product


Family

Existing plants with Ax 1703 automation units (AK 1703 (Ax-Mode), AM 1703 (Ax-Mode),
AMC 1703 (Ax-Mode)) can be networked without problems with automation units described in
this document, either over the serial standard communication according to IEC 69870-5-101
or via Ethernet TCP/IP according to IEC 69870-5-104.

Networking of automation units described in this document with other automation units of the
SICAM RTUs platforms is a standard feature and therefore supported.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 51


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Technical Specifications

General Data

Performance Characteristics

• Multi-processor solution
• Modular
• Spontaneous telecontrol function
• Combined open-/closed-loop control function (periodical)
• Online parameter-settable
• Loadable firmware
• Storage of application data and firmware on replaceable flash card
• Connection to engineering system SICAM TOOLBOX II via fiber optics
• Standard protocols according to
─ IEC 60870-5-101 (end-end, multi-point traffic, dial-up traffic)
─ IEC 60870-5-103 (protection device connection)
─ IEC 60870-5-104 (Ethernet TCP/IP)
• Third-party protocols DNP 3.0 and Modbus
• Transmission rate 50 to 38400 bps (standard baud rates)
• Spontaneous (acknowledged) transmission
• LED-signalling on the front panel of the modules

52 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Mechanical Design

Mechanics
Structure Assembly system for mounting on 35 mm DIN rail
• 1 Master control element
− up to 2 Serial interface modules (SIM) for the communication
• up to 2 Bus interface modules for connecting peripheral elements
• up to 16 Peripheral elements
− detached up to 3 m via USB cable, or
− up to 200 m via fiber optic links
Dimensions (H x W x D) • Master control element 155 x 306 x 75 mm
• Bus interface module CM-0842 133.5 x 141 x 43 mm
• Bus interface module CM-0843 131 x 63 x 73 mm
• Peripheral elements PE-641x
− per module 131 x 63 x 73 mm
− fully equipped 131 x 630 x 73 mm
• Peripheral elements AI-6303/-6304 131 x 252 x 73 mm
Weight • Master control element approx. 1100 g
• Bus interface module CM-0842 ca. 420 g
• Bus interface module CM-0843 ca. 150 g
• Peripheral elements PE-641x
− peripheral control modules approx. 130…160 g 1)
− I/O modules approx. 225…300 g 1)
• Peripheral elements AI-6303, AI-6304
Connectors
Connection system for periph- Plug-connectable screw terminal strips, wire cross section up to
eral signals and power supply 2.5 mm²
Ax 1703 peripheral bus (TTL) D-SUB 9-pin, female (DIN 41652)
Ax 1703 peripheral bus (TTL) RJ45 8-pin, for connecting Cat.5 cables with up to 3 m length
Ax 1703 peripheral bus USB (A series) 4-pin, for connecting USB cables with up to 3 m
(EIA-485) length
SICAM TOOLBOX II (TB) D-SUB 9-pin, female (DIN 41652)
Fieldbus (FB): Profibus DP D-SUB 9-pin, female (DIN 41652)
Connector(s) for serial interfa- 5x RJ45 8-pin
ces (LOC 2), SI0, SI1/ET0,
SI2/FB, SI3)
Connector for modem power D-SUB 9-pin, female (DIN 41652) (left side of the device)
supply or synchronization
Protection against contact, foreign objects and water
Protection type according to • Terminal modules IP40
IEC 60529 − for the belonging terminals IP20
• CP-6014 from the front IP40
− for the belonging terminals from behind IP20
Protection against electric shock
Protection class according to Class II
IEC 61140
1) dependent on type
2) currently not implemented

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 53


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Ambient Conditions

Electrical Environmental Conditions

System Properties

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Immunity against discharge of 8 kV-A IEC 61000-4-2 IEC 60870-2-1 3
static electricity (ESD) 6 kV-C
IEC 60255-22-2 3
Immunity against electromagnetic 10 V/m IEC 61000-4-3 IEC 60870-2-1 2
fields
IEC 60255-22-3 3

Immunity against electromagnetic 10 V/m ENV 50204 IEC 61000-6-2


fields GSM 900 MHz

Radio interference voltage 79/73 dBµV CISPR22 IEC 60870-2-1 A


approx. peak value
CISPR22 A
Radio interference voltage mean 66/60 dBµV CISPR22 IEC 60870-2-1 A
value
CISPR22 A
Radio interference field strength 40/47 dBµV CISPR22 IEC 60870-2-1 A
(10 m)
CISPR22 A
Immunity against 50 Hz magnetic 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-8 IEC 60870-2-1 4
fields

Immunity against induced HF 10 V IEC 61000-4-6 IEC 61000-6-2


voltage

The characteristics required according to the standards IEC 61000-6-2 and IEC 61000-6-4 are
covered by the values listed above.

54 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Power Supply Master Control Element

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Voltage tolerance DC +30/-20% IEC 60870-2-1 IEC 60870-2-1 DC3
IEC 60654-2 >DC3
Voltage ripple DC ≤ 5% IEC 60870-2-1 IEC 60870-2-1 VR3
IEC 60255-11
Interruption time ≤ 10 ms IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 60870-2-1 1
IEC 60255-11
Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
VN ≤ 60 V (SELV circuit)
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW3
VN ≤ 60 V common
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Oscillatory waves 1.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 2
normal
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Fast transient burst 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 3
Surge 1.2/50 µs 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-5
Surge 1.2/50 µs 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 4
normal
IEC 60255-22-5
Surge 100/1300 µs 1.3 UN IEC 61000-4-1 IEC 60870-2-1
normal

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 55


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Power Supply Peripheral Element

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Voltage tolerance DC +30/-20% IEC 60870-2-1 IEC 60870-2-1 DC3
IEC 60654-2 >DC3
Voltage ripple DC ≤ 5% IEC 60870-2-1 IEC 60870-2-1 VR3
IEC 60654-2
Interruption time ≤ 50 ms IEC 61000-4-11 IEC 60870-2-1 >1
IEC 60255-11
Dielectric test 2.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
VN ≤ 60 V (SELV circuit)
IEC 60255-5
Dielectric test 2.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1 VW3
60 V < VN ≤125 V against SELV
circuits
Dielectric test 3.0 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1 >VW3
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V against SELV
circuits
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
VN ≤ 60 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
60 V < VN ≤ 125 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V common
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 >3
normal
IEC 60255-22-1 3
*)
Fast transient source of radio 4.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 4
noise common
IEC 60255-22-4 3
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 4.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 4
common

Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 4.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >4
normal

Impulse voltage 100/1300 µs 1.3 UN IEC 61000-4-1 IEC 60870-2-1


normal

Starting current S1 IEC 60870-4 IEC 60870-4 S1

*)
directly connected

56 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Digital and Analog Standard I/Os

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
VN ≤ 60 V (SELV circuit)
IEC 60255-5
Dielectric test 2.0 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1
60 V < VN ≤125 V against SELV
circuits *)
Dielectric test 3.0 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V against SELV
circuits *)
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
VN ≤ 60 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
60 V < VN ≤ 125 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V common
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Oscillatory waves 1.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 >2
normal
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4
Surge voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 *) IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-5
Surge voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 4
normal
IEC 60255-22-5
*) restriction with usage of TE-6420

Usage of TE-6420
If sensor and TE-6420 reside within a cabinet, the signal lines to the sensor must be carried
out shielded and massed both ways (cabinet feeding, potential equalization of sensor).

With usage of third-party supplied sensors, the signal lines as well as the power supply of the
sensor must be directed in shielded cables. The power supply may be directed max. 1 m un-
shielded between power supply module and terminal. The corresponding power supply mod-
ule may be used exclusively for the sensor feeding, a usage for other plant parts is not al-
lowed.

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 57


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Direct Current and Voltage Inputs

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 2.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
VN ≤ 60 V (SELV circuit)
IEC 60255-5
Dielectric test 2.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1 VW3
60 V < VN ≤125 V against SELV
circuits
Dielectric test 3.0 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60950-1 >VW3
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V against SELV
circuits
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
VN ≤ 60 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
60 V < VN ≤ 125 V common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 5.0 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 VW3
125 V < VN ≤ 230 V common
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 >3
normal
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Fast transient burst 4.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 4
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4
Surge voltage 1.2/50 µs 4.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 4
common
IEC 60255-22-5
Surge voltage 1.2/50 µs 4.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >4
normal
IEC 60255-22-5

58 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Telecommunication Lines V.23

The listed values are valid for screened and twisted-pair cables.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60950-1 IEC 60950-1 >VW2

Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
common
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
normal
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 1.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 2
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4
Surge voltage 10/700 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60950-1 IEC 60950-1
common

Surge voltage 10/700 µs 1.0 kVs IEC 60950-1


normal

Noise immunity against technical 10 V/100 V IEC 61000-4-16 IEC 60870-2-1


line frequencies 50/60 Hz

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 59


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Fieldbus Communication

The listed values are valid for a distance ≤ 100 m for screened twisted-pair cables.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW3
common
IEC 60255-5
Oscillatory waves 2.5 kVs IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-1 3
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 >4
Surge voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.0 kVs IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-5

Local Communication V.24/V.28

The listed values are valid for a distance ≤ 30 m for screened lines.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW3
common
IEC 60255-5
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4

60 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
LAN Communication 10/100Base-T

The listed values are valid for a distance ≤ 100 m for Cat.5 cables.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW3
common
IEC 60255-5
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4

Internal Interface Ax Bus

The listed values are valid for a distance ≤ 3 m screened.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Dielectric test 1.5 kVrms IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW2
IEC 60255-5
Impulse voltage 1.2/50 µs 2.5 kVs IEC 60255-5 IEC 60870-2-1 >VW3
common
IEC 60255-5
Fast transient burst 2.0 kV IEC 61000-4-4 IEC 60870-2-1 3
common
IEC 60255-22-4 4

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 61


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Mechanical Environmental Conditions

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Harmonic sinusoidal
Oscillation 1…9 Hz 3.5 mm IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60870-2-2 >BM
Oscillation 9..200 Hz 10 m/s²
Oscillation 200…500 Hz 15 m/s²
Oscillation 10…150 Hz 10 m/s² IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60255-21-1 1
Shock semi-sinusoidal
Shock 11 ms 100 m/s² IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60870-2-2 BM
Shock 11 ms 15 g IEC 60068-2-27 IEC 60255-21-2 1
Continuous shock semi-sinusoidal
Continuous shock 16 ms 10 g IEC 60068-2-29 IEC 60255-21-2 1
Seismic harmonic sinusoidal
Oscillation 1…8 Hz (horizontal) ±3.5 mm IEC 60068-3-3 IEC 60255-21-3 1
Oscillation 1…8 Hz (vertical) ±1.5 mm
Oscillation 8…35 Hz (horizontal) 1g
Oscillation 8…35 Hz (vertical) 0.5 g

The above listed values cover or exceed the required seismic loading according to
IEC 60870-2-2 Cl.S3 and IEC 60255-21-3 Cl.1. The values apply in operation and for storage.

Attention
The master control element CP-6014 must be mounted with the shock proved mounting part TC6-213--,
MLFB-Nr. 6MF13130GC130AA1 on the DIN rail, if the above listed values must be observed.

Transport
• The permitted mechanical stress during transport depends on the transport packaging.
• The device packaging is not a transport packaging.

62 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Climatic Environmental Conditions

This class is intended for indoor locations with temperature control and a wide range of rela-
tive humidity. The humidity is not controlled.

The devices can be exposed to sun and heat. They can be exposed as well to air flow caused
by draught in buildings, e.g. by open windows or influences of technical processes. Conden-
sation water, precipitations, water and icing do not occur.

Bedewing is possible for a short time (e.g. during the course of maintenance tasks).

Heating and cooling is used to maintain the necessary conditions, especially in case of great
differences between indoor and outdoor climate.

The conditions of this class normally occur in living and working areas, e.g. in production
rooms for electronic and electrotechnical products, telecontrol rooms, storage rooms for valu-
able and sensible devices.

Factor Value Testing standard Product standard Class


Minimum air temperature -25°C IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60870-2-2 C2
IEC 60654-1 C2
*)
Maximum air temperature +70°C IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60870-2-2 C3
IEC 60654-1 C3
Temperature gradient ≤ 30°C/h IEC 60870-2-2 C2
IEC 60654-1 C2
Relative air humidity 5…95% IEC 60870-2-2 C2
IEC 60654-1 C2
3
Absolute air humidity ≤ 29 g/m IEC 60870-2-2 C2
IEC 60654-1 C2
Dry heat 70°C IEC 60068-2-2
4 days

Damp heat 40°C IEC 60068-2-78


4 days

Air pressure 70…106 kPa IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60870-2-2 C2


IEC 60654-1 C2
Storage and transport tempera- -30…+85°C
ture

Component ambient temperature max. +85°C

*)
If SICAM TM is operated under ambient conditions up to +65°C, it is allowed to equipp two SM-2558.

If an operation under ambient conditions from +65°C to +70°C is intended, then only one slot may be
equipped with SM-2558 to avoid an exceeding of the permitted operating temperature of the modules
and to ensure a normal operation.
In this case SIEMENS recommends the use of slot SIM0. SIM0

SIM1

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 63


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Mechanical Design and Installation

TM Modules

The terminal modules of the system SICAM TM are provide a compact housing for the mount-
ing on a TS35 rail (DIN rail) according to european standard EN 50022.

Master Control Module


attached on DIN rail

I/O modules with prin-


ted connecting dia-
grams (examples)

64 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Mounting Location and Space Requirements

The modules of the


system SICAM TM

LOC

RES
 10 

- 01

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3
are designed for the

CPY
ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK

ER

PUS H TO
RELEAS E
6,&$0
installation in a cabi-

X15

X16

6,&$0
10
X14
X5
X10

X11

X12
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
net, rack or on the

SIM 0

FB
TB

SI1 (E TO)
P USH TO
R ELEASE

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6

NC

SI0

SI3

24 -6 0V DC
X2

X13
PW R
wall. The mounting is
possible horizontally
or vertically.

horizontal installation

vertical installation

306 63 141

The space require-


RES
 10 

- 01

LOC

RY
SI0
SI1
SI2
SI3

CPY

ments depend basi-


ERx RX TX

/LK

/LK

X1
COM
/PK

/PK
ER

RELEASE
PUSH TO
155

6,&$0

cally on the mounting


X15

X16

6,&$0
1 0
X14
X5
X10

X11

X12

position.
X3

X6

X7

X8

X9

X4

WD

ER
SIM0

FB

20 or
TB

SI1 (ETO)
RELEASE
PUSH TO

M-PRE/0

M-PRE/1

M-PRE/2

M-PRE/3
SI2 (FB)

PUSH TO UNLOCK

1 2 3 4 5 6
NC

SI0

SI3

30
24-60VDC
X2

X13
PWR

With vertical installa-


tion, an end bracket
20 or
must be considered 30
at the respective
lower end of the mod-
ules (10 mm).
130

20 or
The height results 30
from the module size,
HÖHE

the size of the cable


ducts used and their 80

distance to the mod-


80
HEIGHT (mm)

ules (20 mm without,


63
and 30 mm with lead 630 (system with 8 I/O modules)
)
m
labeling). H
(m
PT
DE

WIDTH (mm)

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 65


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Ordering Information

Master Control Module

Designation Item number / MLFB


CP-6014 Master Control Module GC6-014
6MF11130GA140AA0

Shock proved mounting part for Master Control Module

Bezeichnung Sachnummer / MLFB


TC6-213 TC6-213
Shock proved mounting part 6MF13130GC130AA0
CP-x003, 6014

Interface Modules

Fieldbus Interface Processor (FIP)

Designation Item number / MLFB


SM-2545 BA2-545
Profibus Interface (Master) 6MF10110CF450AA0

66 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Serial Interface Processor (SIP)

Designation Item number / MLFB


SM-2551 BC2-551
6MF10130CF510AA0
Serial Interface Processor
2 Interfaces

SM-0551 BC0-551
Serial Interface Processor 1 Interface 6MF10130AF510AA0

(can be equipped on SM-2558)

Network Interface Processor (NIP)

Designation Item number / MLFB


SM-2557 BC2-557
Ethernet 100TX 2 Interfaces 6MF10130CF570AA0

SM-2558 BC2-558
6MF10130CF580AA0
Ethernet-Interf. 1x100TX,
+1 serial interface optional

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 67


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Power Supply for Peripheral Elements

Designation Item number / MLFB


PS-6630 GC6-630
Power Supply 24…60 VDC EMC+ 6MF11130GG300AA0

PS-6632 GC6-632
Power Supply 110…220 VDC EMC+ 6MF11130GG320AA0

68 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Peripheral Control Modules

Designation Item number / MLFB


PE-6410 Peripheral Controller GC6-410
1x Ax PE bus electrical 6MF11130GE100AA0

PE-6411 Peripheral Controller GC6-411


1x Ax PE bus optical 6MF11130GE110AA0

PE-6412 Peripheral Control Module GC6-412


2x Ax PE bus optical 6MF11130GE120AA0

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 69


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
I/O Modules

Designation Item number / MLFB


DI-6100 Binary Input GC6-100
2x8, 24…60 VDC 6MF11130GB000AA0

DI-6101 Binary Input GC6-101


2x8, 110/220 VDC 6MF11130GB010AA0

DI-6102 Binary Input GC6-102


2x8, 24…60 VDC 1 ms 6MF11130GB020AA0

DI-6103 Binary Input GC6-103


2x8, 110/220 VDC 1 ms 6MF11130GB030AA0

70 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Designation Item number / MLFB
DI-6104 Binary Input GC6-104
2x8, 110/220 VDC 1 ms 6MF11130GB040AA0

DO-6200 Binary Output Transistor GC6-200


2x8, 24…60 VDC 6MF11130GC000AA0

DO-6212 Binary Output Relays GC6-212


8x 24…220 VDC/230 VAC 6MF11130GC200AA0

DO-6220 Command Output Base GC6-220


Module 6MF11130GC200AA0

DO-6221 Command Output Base GC6-221


Module with Measurement 6MF11130GC210AA0

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 71


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Designation Item number / MLFB
DO-6230 Command Output Relay GC6-230
Module 6MF11130GC300AA0

AI-6300 Analog Input GC6-300


2x2 ±20 mA/±10 V 6MF11130GD000AA0

AI-6307 Analog Input GC6-307


2x2 ±5 mA/±10 V 6MF11130GD070AA0

AI-6308 Analog Input GC6-308


2x2 ±2 mA/±10 V 6MF11130GD080AA0

AI-6310 Analog Input GC6-310


2x2 Pt100/Ni100 6MF11130GD100AA0

72 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Designation Item number / MLFB
AO-6380 Analog Output GC6-380
4x ±20 mA/±10 mA/±10 V 6MF11130GD800AA0

TE-6420 Speed Measurement GC6-420


2x2 5 VDC/24 VDC/NAMUR 6MF11130GE200AA0

TE-6430 Counting Pulse Inp. GC6-430


2x24…60 VDC 6MF11130GE300AA0

TE-6450 Position Acquisition GC6-450


2x2 SSI/RS-422 6MF11130GE500AA0

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 73


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
TM I/O-Module Extension Cable

Designation Item number / MLFB


CM-6810 TM I/O-Modules Extension GC6-810
Cable 6MF11130GJ100AA0

Peripheral Elements with Direct Transformer Input

Designation Item number / MLFB


AI-6303/TIPS05 Direct Trans- GC6-303
former Input (4x220 V, 3x6 A) 6MF11130GD030AA0
Ax PE bus electrical + optical

AI-6304/TIPS05 Direct Trans- GC6-304


former Input (4x220V,3x6 A) 6MF11130GD040AA0
2x Ax PE bus optical

74 SICAM TM System Data Sheet


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Bus Interface Modules

Designation Item number / MLFB


CM-0843 Ax 1703 Bus Interface GA0-843
electrical 6MF11110AJ430AA0

CM-0842 Ax 1703 Bus Interface GA0-842


4x optical 6MF11110AJ420AA0

SICAM TM System Data Sheet 75


MC6-007-2.03, Edition 06.2013
Literature

Folder SICAM TM MC6-003-2


Folder SICAM TOOLBOX II M30-001-3
SICAM RTUs Common Functions Peripheral Elements according to DC0-011-2
IEC 60870-5-101/104
SICAM RTUs Common Functions System and Basic System Elements DC0-015-2
SICAM RTUs Platforms Configuration Automation Units and Automation Networks DC0-021-2
SICAM TM I/O Modules DC6-041-2
Data Sheet PS-663x MC6-027-2
Data Sheet CP-6014/CPCX65 MC6-033-2
Data Sheet SM-2545/DPM00 MC0-007-2
Data Sheet SM-x551/PROTOCOL MC0-003-2
Data Sheet SM-25x4/ET02 MC0-005-2
Data Sheet SM-25xx/ETA2 MC0-047-2
Data Sheet SM-2558/ETA4 MC0-049-2
Data Sheet SM-2558/ETA3 MC0-053-2
Data Sheet SM-25x6/ET03 MC0-037-2
Data Sheet SM-25x6/PROTOCOL MC0-029-2
Data Sheet PE-641x/USIO66 MC6-031-2
Data Sheet PE-641x/TCIO66 MC6-036-2
Data Sheet AI-630x/TIPS05 MC6-025-2
Data Sheet CM-0842 MC0-021-2
Data Sheet CM-0843 MC0-023-2
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

SICAM 230
Energy Automation

SICAM 230

7.0 SP0

Functional description

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 1
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

History
Date Version Comment
20.07.2009 1.0 Created (Robert Eckert, Philipp Artmeier)

22.05.2011 1.1 Update to 6.51 (Philipp Artmeier)

04.12.2012 1.2 Update to 7.0 (Philipp Artmeier)

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 2
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Contents

1. Overview ..................................................................................................................................... 6

2. Components ............................................................................................................................... 7

2.1. Optional modules ...................................................................................................................................................... 8

2.2. Data point engineering ............................................................................................................................................ 10

3. System architecture and concepts.......................................................................................... 12

3.1. Scalability ............................................................................................................................................................... 12

3.2. Network architecture ............................................................................................................................................... 13

3.3. Sample configurations............................................................................................................................................. 14

4. Multi-hierarchy.......................................................................................................................... 18

5. Web access............................................................................................................................... 20

5.1. Web access based on “ActiveX” .............................................................................................................................. 20

5.2. Web access based on “MS Terminal Server” ........................................................................................................... 21

6. Editor workstation .................................................................................................................... 22

6.1. Workspace ............................................................................................................................................................. 22

6.2. Multi-user Editor...................................................................................................................................................... 28

6.3. Wizards .................................................................................................................................................................. 29

6.4. Project backups ...................................................................................................................................................... 29

6.5. Drag & Drop............................................................................................................................................................ 30

6.6. Symbols ................................................................................................................................................................. 30

6.7. Dynamic elements................................................................................................................................................... 32

6.8. VBA/VSTA.............................................................................................................................................................. 36

7. Installation ................................................................................................................................ 37

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 3
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

8. Updates / Hotfixes .................................................................................................................... 38

8.1. Build ....................................................................................................................................................................... 38

8.2. Service packs ......................................................................................................................................................... 38

9. Server licenses ......................................................................................................................... 39

9.1. SRX licenses .......................................................................................................................................................... 39

9.2. SRXR licenses........................................................................................................................................................ 39

9.3. Prot licenses ........................................................................................................................................................... 39

9.4. Gateway functionality .............................................................................................................................................. 40

9.5. Dedicated Server .................................................................................................................................................... 40

10. SICAM 230 embedded Version ................................................................................................ 41

11. Process connection ................................................................................................................. 42

11.1. General............................................................................................................................................................... 42

11.2. AK driver IEC 60870-5-101/104 ........................................................................................................................... 44

11.3. IEC 61850........................................................................................................................................................... 46

11.4. Mathematics driver .............................................................................................................................................. 48

11.5. System driver...................................................................................................................................................... 49

11.6. Further Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 50

11.7. Allocations .......................................................................................................................................................... 50

12. Basic components.................................................................................................................... 51

12.1. Functions............................................................................................................................................................ 51

12.2. Alarm management ............................................................................................................................................. 54

12.3. Rema/Limits........................................................................................................................................................ 55

12.4. Alarm List............................................................................................................................................................ 57

12.5. Picture alarming .................................................................................................................................................. 58

12.6. Chronological Event List ...................................................................................................................................... 59

12.7. User administration ............................................................................................................................................. 60

12.8. System pictures .................................................................................................................................................. 61

12.9. World view .......................................................................................................................................................... 62

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 4
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.10. Command input................................................................................................................................................... 65

12.11. Status list............................................................................................................................................................ 69

12.12. Status test........................................................................................................................................................... 69

12.13. Counter groups ................................................................................................................................................... 70

12.14. Menus and context menus................................................................................................................................... 70

12.15. Time control ........................................................................................................................................................ 71

12.16. Online language switch ....................................................................................................................................... 71

12.17. Multi-monitor ....................................................................................................................................................... 72

12.18. Archiving............................................................................................................................................................. 73

12.19. Extended Trend .................................................................................................................................................. 75

13. Options...................................................................................................................................... 76

13.1. Topological coloring (Topology) ........................................................................................................................... 76

13.2. Error location from protection device .................................................................................................................... 79

13.3. Current distribution calculation............................................................................................................................. 81

13.4. Switching administration module.......................................................................................................................... 81

13.5. Report generator ................................................................................................................................................. 82

13.6. Easy Energy Reports........................................................................................................................................... 82

13.7. Message Control ................................................................................................................................................. 83

13.8. Network manager (NWM) .................................................................................................................................... 83

13.9. OPC DA Server................................................................................................................................................... 84

13.10. OPC UA Server................................................................................................................................................... 84

13.11. SQL Server ......................................................................................................................................................... 84

13.12. Switching sequences and simulation.................................................................................................................... 85

13.13. EMS ................................................................................................................................................................... 86

13.14. Production and Facility Scheduler ........................................................................................................................ 89

13.15. SICAM 230 SQL Online....................................................................................................................................... 90

13.16. Straton................................................................................................................................................................ 90

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 5
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

1. Overview
This SICAM 230 functional description gives an overview of the functionality of version 7.0.

SICAM 230 is a scalable control system that is suitable for a wide range of applications, ranging from local system
control with touch panels to redundant client-server control stations for small and medium sized municipal energy
suppliers.

Multiple SICAM 230 control systems can be combined to form a “multi-hierarchic” compound. Changes to each of
the subsystems will then be automatically shared across the whole compound.

This makes it possible to monitor control stations that are manned during daytime via one central control station
during nighttime, for example. The software takes care of the required authorizations.

Another important feature of the SICAM 230 control system is its simple engineering capability. The data point list
file is usually generated from the OPM II. The OPM II is a part of the parameterization and service software
Toolbox II.
The OPM II is the central data management tool for the object-oriented engineering of telecontrol systems, control
systems and any type of third-party systems.

The engineering interface of the SICAM 230 editor is used for drawing pictures, defining archives and inserting
functions and picture symbols from a library.

Hardware requirements:

Generally, SICAM 230 runs on all modern x86 computer systems.

Recommended minimum system configuration:

• CPU 2 GHz or higher


• 2048 MB main memory
• 6 GB free hard disk space
Software requirements:

• Windows XP, Windows 7 (32Bit und 64Bit), Windows Server 2008 R2

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 6
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

2. Components
This chapter provides a short summary. Each of the modules will be described in detail in the following chapters.

The SICAM 230 software consists of 2 separate license components: the “Editor license”, which is used for
engineering systems, and the “Runtime license” (server or client) for the computers that the control system will be
executed on.

The Editor works with MS Windows PC operating systems and can manage several control system projects at the
same time. In case the Runtime is not running on the same computer as the Editor, any modified parameters will
be transferred via “Remote Transport”, keeping the control system up-to-date.

SRX Runtime licenses for Windows PC operating systems differ according to the number of licensed data points
(500Basic/750/2500/5000/unlimited) and contain the following functionality:

• Picture display
• Alarm and event list
• Command input element
• Picture alarming element
• Time control
• IEC 60870-101/104 communication
• IEC 61850 communication
• Archiving system for measured values (SRX 500 Basic only Starter Edition)
• Extended trend display with analytic functions (SRX 500 Basic only Starter Edition)
• World view including zoom de-cluttering, navigator and station list
• Network technology (client-server; redundancy; multi-hierarchy; circular redundancy)
• VBA/VSTA

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 7
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

2.1. Optional modules

For PC operating systems, the following extension modules are available:

Topological coloring
Extension module for determining and displaying the current topology of electrical networks. Depending on the
states of switching elements and interlockings, the network topology will be displayed in different colors. The
parameterization is derived from the graphical representation.

Fault location
Graphical display of the probable short circuit location on the electrical line. This is based on the line data and the
error impedance from the protection device. (The extension module “Topology” is required for this function).

Current distribution calculation


SICAM 230 calculates energy distribution using a simplified, single-phase, strictly ohmic model without the phase
angle. During the multi-step command, the system calculates the future grid status and alarms the user if there is
a risk of overload.

Switching administration module


From request to approval and planning to implementation, all the necessary transactions are displayed in one
user-friendly workflow and are seamlessly documented.

Report Generator
Option for creating tabular reports from historical and online process data.

Easy Energie Reports


Option for creating tabular and graphic reports from historical process data with Microsoft Excel.

Message Control
Extension module for sending alarms via SMS and voice message.

Network manager (NWM)


Network management extension module based on SNMP for monitoring network components like routers,
switches, printers etc.

OPC Server
Extension module for providing SICAM 230 process data via OPC. OPC clients can use this interface to access
online data.

SQL Server
Allows the transparent evacuation of archive data into an SQL database

Switching sequences & simulation


Allows the recording, editing and replaying of switching sequences. Furthermore, a client workstation can be
switched to “Simulation” mode. The simulation can be based on the current process/simulation status or a stored
one.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 8
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

EMS
Short-term supply optimization for gas (1 h) and energy (15 min); uses results from the peak load projection and
tries to avoid supply limit violations by shutdowns, storage actions or short-term local production. The module can
be used in the „closed” and “open loop“ operation mode.

WEB Server
Process pictures can be accessed via Internet Explorer. There is an ActiveX-based version with read-only access
as well as a Pro version with full access. Furthermore, Web access is also possible via the MS terminal server.

Process connection
For connecting to the process, the SICAM 230 provides the IEC standard interfaces 60870-5-101, 60870-5-104
and 61850 (contained in the basic package) as well as 100 further protocols for remote control, PLC technology
and building automation.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 9
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

2.2. Data point engineering

Data point engineering refers to the basic properties of a data point, like remote control telegram address,
measured value scaling etc.
Generally, you can create the entire data pool of a SICAM 230 project in the SICAM 230 Editor.

However, it is recommended to use the SIEMENS TOOLBOX II for data point engineering. The functionality of the
TOOLBOX II is not addressed in this document.
If remote control substations or remote control centers are engineered with the TOOLBOX II (OPM II), you can
automatically generate the data pool for the SICAM 230 control system based on that.

Using the TOOLBOX II has the following advantages:

Integrated system
• One tool for all systems
• Third-party systems
• Continuous engineering
• Scalable

Object-orientation
• Simple and transparent engineering
• More engineering quality
• More efficient engineering
• Less costs

Continuous data storage


• Central database
• Less input efforts
• No need for multiple inputs
• Less input errors

Engineering of the procedural process


• Reduction of efforts for first creation
• More rational and efficient engineering

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 10
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Functions for SICAM automation systems


• Simple system test – online and offline
• Plain text diagnosis
• Remote maintenance
• Logging and simulation of telegrams
• Local and remote functions

Functions for control center systems


• Engineering of process variables
• Non-redundant data input (e.g. by using the SICAM 1703 telegram address)
• Automatic generation of attributes with formulas
• Automatic generation of the text address
• Generation of the database

Functions for linking, monitoring and controlling


• Full graphic interface
• Object-oriented
• Fully IEC 61131-3 compliant
• Simple offline/online test

Functions for third-party systems


• Open interfaces
• Storage of engineering data
• Simple re-use of existing data
• Define any attributes in the customer project itself

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 11
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

3. System architecture and concepts

3.1. Scalability

The scalability of the process control system guarantees system solutions that are adjusted to the different
requirements of all process and information levels. Scalability allows for:

• operation close to the process, connecting to existing systems with adjusted handling concepts and
optimizations for touch screen operation
• the use as central control stations with branch-specific functions and multi-workstation architectures.
branch-specific servers increase the available CPU performance and allow for selective
maintenance.
• operation in distributed, multi-hierarchic control station environments
• the use of redundant control stations in every process level
• the provision of process information in the MS Office world via WEB clients without any extra
engineering efforts.

Another advantage of the continuous scalability is that all described systems are created, maintained and backed
up with one and the same engineering tool.

The scalability is also reflected in the different available licenses. The embedded and PC basic licenses differ
according to the number of licensed data points.

Redundant
Systems
Touch devices Stand-Alone

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 12
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

3.2. Network architecture

The network architecture of the process control system is based on the standardized TCP/IP network protocol
and a multi-server/multi-client structure. Based on this architecture, a large number of configurations can be
implemented, for example:

• Process server (also redundant) with additional workstations (clients)


• Work stations simultaneously accessing information (process pictures, lists, trends etc.) on multiple
process servers (multi clients)
• Distributed, multi-hierarchic control station configurations with decentralized pre-processing of
process data and central access to subordinate servers
• Remote workstations, e.g. for telework and remote maintenance, with full or restricted access to all
process information provided by the process servers

The network architecture is characterized by the following functions:

• Simple and dialog-oriented engineering that does not require any special network skills
• Permanent watch dog monitoring of all network communications
• Automatic parameter synchronization between all control stations in the network (during live
operation, after interrupted connection/restart)
• Time synchronization of all workstations with the central time master
• Network-wide management of unique authorizations

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 13
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

3.3. Sample configurations

3.3.1. Stand-alone

The most simple version is a stand-alone device with the SICAM 230 Server Runtime. This computer takes care
of all tasks, ranging from communication and process functions (like alarming) to visualization tasks.

Communication can be performed via the normal serial interface (e.g. with IEC 60870-101), via the Ethernet
interface (e.g. with IEC 60870-104; IEC 61850) or also via proprietary interface cards when using optional PLC
drivers.

IEC 60870-101

Illustration: Stand-alone serial Illustration: Stand-alone Ethernet

3.3.2. Distributed configuration

In this configuration, additional SICAM 230 clients were added to the SICAM 230 server.

A distributed configuration requires the client(s) to have a TCP/IP network connection to the SICAM 230 server.
For simple visualization functions, a bandwidth of 64kBit and above is sufficient. If the clients are supposed to
display historical data (e.g. archives) in curves and tables or large parts of alarm/event lists, we recommend using
a higher bandwidth. Furthermore, project changes to objects like pictures will also be synchronized automatically
via this connection, which may lead to long delays when using a limited bandwidth.

Illustration: Distributed configuration

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 14
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

3.3.3. Redundant configuration

The redundant functionality of the SICAM 230 system is only available in the SRX, SRXR and dedicated server.

There are so-called “SXR RED…” licenses. They are a bundle of 2 normal SRX server licenses. However, it is
also possible to configure one redundant system by combining two separately purchased SICAM 230 licenses. All
SICAM 230 network functions including redundancy and multi-hierarchy are already a part of the basic licenses.

The redundancy concept works as follows:

The name of the (preferred) server and the standby server need to be defined in the Editor:

Illustration: Configuration for redundant operation

Every server must have a communication interface and a network connection to all substations.

If the project server is started on one computer, the names of the server/standby server and the local computer
name will be checked.

This check will then trigger one the following startup procedures:

Local computer is the (preferred) server


The computer checks whether the computer defined as the standby server is the same as the currently active
server. If this is the case, it synchronizes with that computer (historical and online data) and then promotes itself
to be the active server.

If the standby server is not active, the (preferred) server starts up immediately.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 15
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Local computer is the standby server


In this case, the standby server checks whether the (preferred) server is active. If this is the case, it starts the
synchronization and then remains in the state of the standby server. In this state, it can be compared with a client
that additionally synchronizes historical data with the server and buffers communication in the receive direction
(see below). The standby server receives process data from the active server. Commands are also sent only via
the active server.

If the (preferred) server is not active, the standby server starts up immediately.

As a safety measure for a crash of the active server, the standby server maintains a telegram buffer that is fed
into the system after it is promoted to be the active server. This makes sure that none of the telegrams are lost in
case the active server suddenly crashes.

Local computer is neither the (preferred) server nor the standby server
The computer starts as a client and then tries to connect to the (preferred) server. If that server is not available,
the client tries to connect to the standby server.

The smallest possible redundant system consists of two PCs that are connected via a network. The bandwidth of
such a network connection should be at least 100 MBit and should also have a redundant configuration between
the servers. If there is no redundant connection between the servers, both servers may see themselves as the
active server in case of a network failure and then log only their local command inputs. In this case, only the
archives of the “preferred” server will be preserved.

Illustration: Redundant distribution

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 16
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Circular redundancy
Circular Redundancy is a unique technology to efficiently combine several redundant projects. The Circular
Redundancy combines the functionalities multi-project administration and redundancy to a cost effective
possibility to increase equipment availability.

For redundant projects, you usually need two PCs. One PC is the server, the other one is the standby. When you
have two projects, you require four PCs, and so on. Circular redundancy also allows you to manage multiple
projects: Several projects can run simultaneously on one PC.

Each PC is the server for one project and at the same time the standby server for the neighboring project; and
additionally, it can be the client for other projects. This results in a circle. This functionality offers an enormous
potential for cost reduction for both hardware and software. Instead of 4, 6, or 8 PCs and licenses you now only
need half.

Illustration: Circular redundancy

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 17
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

4. Multi-hierarchy
Nowadays, control centers often need to be connected directly. Therefore, functions
like archiving, alarming etc. need to be executed decentrally, so they can be used
by superordinate levels as well.

The control stations of one process level can be connected with each other, so that
every control station can be the central of the neighboring control station, if required.

Such a multi-hierarchy meets the following challenges:

• One of the most essential things is project management and


maintenance. This task is solved by way of single projects that are
combined dynamically on the higher levels. A centralized project
management function is required to support the system administrator
with the synchronization and maintenance of the geographically
distributed computers.
• In order to reduce data traffic, data is filtered and aggregated on every
level via a node function.
• On every hierarchy level, the subordinate stations are monitored by
way of event and alarm lists.
• Management of authorizations is unique, making sure that commands
can be sent to a substation only from one computer at the same time.

• The network connections between the hierarchies are the foundation of a distributed control station
system. That is why the permanent monitoring of all network components is the most important
requirement for a high availability of the complete system.
• Data communication has been optimized with regard to WAN connections that are subject to costs.
• An integrated system monitoring function signalizes failures of subordinate control stations.

The project parameters of every server are available in every control station level. These parameters are again
subdivided into small parameter units like pictures, variables etc. In case of a parameter change, this means that
only the affected partial parameters need to be synchronized in the control station levels.

This concept results in a significant reduction of WAN load during project synchronization and a simpler
synchronization of all superordinate levels.

The project parameters are stored centrally in project-selective databases that the Editor can access, e.g. when
pictures are changed. Via the WAN/LAN connection, the Editor can be used in every process level. After the
changes are done, the changed parameters are copied to the according server via the WAN/LAN in the form of
aggregated parameter files and then the server is re-initialized. The server will automatically trigger the
synchronization of the superordinate levels and their re-initialization.

This automatic mechanism takes an immense load off the system administrator, as he only has to care about the
maintenance of the servers in the lowest levels, while the consistency of the parameters in the complete system is
guaranteed.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 18
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

An essential element of the maintenance and servicing of the single projects is the clearly structured project
management in the construction tool. For this task, an integrated project manager has been implemented, which
offers the following functions:

• Display of the project hierarchy in a tree structure in the project manager window. Free assignment
of projects to the different levels via drag&drop, i.e. by moving the project to the desired level. With
the graphical creation of the hierarchy, all parameters for the automatic synchronization and
initialization of the control station levels are generated.
• The parameters of the single projects can be accessed by using selection.
• You can use a superordinate global project to define parameters that are available in all single
projects. This includes, for example, font libraries, user definitions, window types, authorizations,
alarm classifications etc.

As the process can be controlled by way of command inputs, alarm acknowledgements etc. from every control
station level, the command authority must be clearly defined between these levels. In order to guarantee this, one
token per server in the hierarchy is maintained in addition to the local user rights. Process control is enabled only
by the combination of authorization and this token. Every level can request the command authority over this
token.

Central SCADA and Service

WAN

Sub Control Center

WAN WAN

Local SCADA Systems

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 19
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

5. Web access
There are two available technologies for accessing the SICAM 230 control system with an Internet browser:

• ActiveX („WEB SERVER“ and „WEB SERVER PRO“)


• MS Terminal Server („WEB TERMS“)

5.1. Web access based on “ActiveX”

There are two versions of Web access based on “ActiveX”.

• WEB SERVER
• WEB SERVER PRO

Illustration: Web server

In the standard version (“WEB SERVER”), only viewing is allowed. This means that you can view all pictures,
lists, curves etc., provided you have the appropriate rights. Command actions like command input, set point input
or alarm acknowledgement are not possible.

The “WEB SERVER PRO” version also allows you to perform command actions, as if you were using a normal
client.

The SICAM 230 client software is embedded into an ActiveX control element. A Web client behaves like a normal
client, i.e. project data (pictures, functions…) are transmitted to the client after they are changed. If the connection
has only a low bandwidth, delays may occur.

The ActiveX element is version-dependent, which means that the Web client computers also have to install the
new ActiveX element after an update of the system. This requires local administrator rights.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 20
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

The Web server based on “ActiveX” can run as an option for an existing SICAM 230 Runtime or also on a
separate computer. This does not require a server operating system.

Limitations:
• Displaying a “project main menu” (dropdown menu) is not possible.
• No additional applications, e.g. Excel, can be executed in the Web browser.
• No Easy Energy Report, no Switching Administration.

5.2. Web access based on “MS Terminal Server”

When using Web access based on “MS Terminal Server”, a SICAM 230 client is started several times in separate
and encapsulated sessions on the terminal server. Remote access from a Terminal Server Client (TSClient) takes
place via a Remote Desktop Connection (RDP).

Illustration: Terminal server

Therefore, no special software is required on the Terminal Server Client. As these are fully-fledged SICAM 230
clients, there are not limitations regarding access.

No process data (only picture information) is exchanged between terminal server and terminal server client.
Therefore, less network bandwidth is required.

When using multi-monitor systems, the RDP client must support multiple monitors that can be switched off at the
same time.

The terminal server is based on the Microsoft Terminal Server technology and requires MS Windows 2008 R2
Server to work.

As opposed to a usual SICAM 230 Web server, the Web server based on MS Terminal Server requires a
separate computer and cannot be executed on a SICAM 230 server computer.

The SICAM 230 Editor cannot be executed on the Terminal Server computer.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 21
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6. Editor workstation

SICAM 230 consists of the Editor and the Runtime:

The project is created, modified and maintained in the Editor.

The project is visualized and operated in the Runtime.

6.1. Workspace

The user interface of the Editor consists of different areas: Project Manager, Detail View of the Project Manager,
toolbars, property window and property help.

The workspace window is positioned on the left border as a default and includes two property pages: the Project
Manager and the Symbols. In the Project Manager, new variables, functions, pictures, etc. are created. The
symbol library offers pre-defined graphics, which can be used in new projects.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 22
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.1.1. Project Manager

The Project Manager is the core of the Editor. This is where the current workspace with
its associated projects is displayed. The Project Manager is the central interface for the
functionality of projects.

Detail View of the Project Manager


The detail view displays the properties of the selected entry of the project manager. By
right-clicking on a table header and selecting fields, you can show or hide columns that
are not displayed yet. You can also format and change the column width. Some objects
(e.g. variables, pictures, functions) are displayed as lists in the detail view. In this case,
further information about the number of all available/all currently displayed/all selected
objects is displayed as well.

Tool tip
If you move the mouse pointer over a button, you will see a tool tip that shows you the
function of the button.

Navigation in the list view


By entering the first character, the search is started. If an entry starting with this
character is found, it will be selected and an input field will be displayed. If another
character is entered, it is searched for and the associated entry is selected.

Sorting in the list view can also be cascading, i.e. you can sort on several columns simultaneously. Clicking on a
column header sorts entries by the arguments in this column. Hold the SHIFT key to add other columns for
sorting.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 23
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Filtering list entries


Alphabetic sorting:
Click on the title of a column to sorts the list by the selected column.

Checkboxes:
You can filter by active or inactive checkboxes.

Place holder:
If you want to filter only by a certain character, you can use * and ? as wildcards.

Filter in 'linked elements':


If you jump from an element to an element in the detail view (e.g. a variable) with the option 'linked elements', the
element is shown even if it does not match the currently used filter. You will find it at the end of the list. It will
automatically be selected.

Multiselect
There are cases, in which a Multiselect of properties is required. For example, if you create a dynamic picture
element Text Button and some other static element and select both of them, you will see the properties in which
they differ from each other in red letters in the property window.

This allows you to make simultaneous changes, like changing the background color of all selected elements.

Search replace
SICAM 230 supports a search/replace functionality for strings (e.g. picture names, variable names, variable
identifications):

In the context menu of the detail view, select the entry 'Replace text in selected column'. The replacements are
defined in the dialog 'Replace text in selected column'.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 24
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

External files
For external files within a project, it is possible to insert specific entries into the project manager. To insert
external files in the project, select the entry “Files” in the project manager.

6.1.2. Properties window

The properties window displays parameters and properties of objects selected in the detail view of the Project
Manager resp. of elements selected in a picture. In the properties window, you can edit the properties of the
selected objects or elements.
Use the icons at the top to change various settings for the properties window. The settings for the view, sorting
and the favourites are saved for the next start of the Editor.

There are different viewing options for the properties window:

Grouped view

All properties of the selected object are listed in logical groups. With the context menu, properties can be added to
or removed from the Favorites.

All properties

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 25
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

All properties of the selected object are displayed in one list. With the context menu, properties can be added to
or removed from the Favorites.

Dialog view

All properties are displayed logically and presented as a dialog.

Favorites
The selected view (grouped, all properties) is extended by the section 'Favorites'. It is in the first position. In the
section 'Favorites', the most frequently used properties are listed.

Default favorites are proposed. Properties can be added to or removed from the favorites individually. You can do
this either by using the context menu 'Add XYZ to favorites' or by moving the desired property to the favorites
using Drag&Drop. The order of the properties in the favorites is determined by the sorting criterion (ascending,
descending, logic).

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 26
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Embedded help
The Embedded Help is displayed below the Property window. There, the selected property is explained.

As opposed to the F1 online help, the properties help gives a short description of the currently selected property.
The advantage of this properties help (embedded help) is that it is integrated in the Editor and the user does not
have to leave the Editor to switch to the F1 online Help. You can find more information on the respective topic in
the online help. You can access the online help by pressing F1. Many embedded help entries provide a direct link
to the respective topic in the online help.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 27
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.2. Multi-user Editor

Illustration: Multi-user Editor

The Multi-user function of the control system allows multiple users to concurrently work on the same project.

For this, the projects are stored on a central SQL Server and can be worked on from different workstations at the
same time. The central storage of the project will be called Server DB in the following text.

Allow changes:
In order to be able to change elements, the status ‘Allow changes’ has to be activated for them.
This can be done in the context menu of the selected element.

For quicker editing, it is possible to check out the complete module of the variable administration. This means that
all variables, drivers and data types are locked for all other users.

Accept changes:
The changes are transferred into the server project. The element/module is unlocked for other users.

If changes were allowed via a module, they can also only be accepted via the module.

This means, that all variables, drivers and data types are transferred and unlocked for other users. Accepting a
single element is not possible in this case.
The changes in the local project copy are discarded and overwritten by the server data.

The element/module is then unlocked for other users.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 28
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.3. Wizards

SICAM 230 allows you to automate the engineering of


projects with wizards. This way, frequently recurring tasks
can be sourced out to a wizard, which programmatically
executes the desired actions, e.g. creating a project,
creating templates and pictures in a pre-defined standard.
Another field of application for wizards are changes in
existing projects, e.g. changing properties of dynamic
elements in all pictures of an existing project. The wizards
are based on Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA)
and the SICAM 230 object model.

At the moment the following wizards are available:

Project Wizard
This wizard leads you step by step through the creation of a new project. With this wizard, the user can adapt the
project individually to his desires.

Import Wizard
This wizard helps you with the import of variables, functions, pictures and scripts from a XML file.

World View Wizard


This wizard helps you with the definition of a world view picture in an existing project.
It offers the following picture types:

• Worldview Overview
• World view
• Function Picture switch
.

Wizard for keyword creation


The project is searched for texts and the found texts are replaced by keywords (i.e. a “@” is added in front of the
texts). The project is scanned for keywords. These keywords are inserted into the language table.

Wizard for keyword translation


This wizard adds the system texts to the language table. These text files are necessary for using the wizard.

Wizard for creating variables


This wizard creates variables (system control variables) for a selected driver.

The wizards are available as VBA source code files on the installation CD. New wizards can be implemented with
the VBA environment.

6.4. Project backups

Project backup

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 29
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Project backups can be created and restored in the Editor.

You can also export project backups and restore them on another workstation.
The exported project backup will automatically be stored in the compressed ZIP format.

Workstation backup
A workstation backup contains several project backups and their interrelations in a compressed file.

6.5. Drag & Drop

All dynamic elements can be linked to variables, colors, fonts and many other attributes via drag & drop.

This allows you, for example, to link dynamic elements with variables very fast and intuitively.

6.6. Symbols

Symbols
The picture editor allows you to create any kind of symbol and store them in reusable symbol libraries.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 30
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Inherited symbols
Inherited symbols can consist of static and dynamic picture elements and allow you to dynamize complex picture
contents by replacing variable links.This gives you the advantage that you can manage complete branches
centrally. If you make a change to the original symbol, it will automatically be inherited to all copies.

To make complex symbols more universal, you can also choose to inherit single properties like visibility,
background color and authorization groups.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 31
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.7. Dynamic elements

Different elements are available for representing dynamic process states in the pictures.
The existing dynamic picture elements can be selected via the toolbar or the menu item "Dyn. Elements".

The available elements are:

Bar Graph Display values as bar graph

Bitmap button Display bitmaps (pixel graphics; *.bmp, *.jpg, *.gif, *.png and *.wmf); operating
bay

Combined element Display one or more variables in color or symbol (chained characters)

Combo/List boxes Link values of process variables with text messages

Move Element Move objects and change their size

Message Display texts from a text table

Multi-binary Element Display several variables in one picture point in colour and symbol (string)

Switch Simple command initiation or set value input element

Text button Operating field in button display

Link Text Display texts (e.g. limit texts, long text)

Trend Graph Simple line graphics

Clock Date and time

Universal slider Slider control

Invisible button Transparent operating field

Numerical value Display values numerically

Indicating instrument Value in instrument display

Binary Element Take colors from status configuration

Animated graphics Animate graphics

The following section is about the most important dynamic picture element for the energy industry: the Combined
Element.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 32
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.7.1. Combined element

The dynamic element "Combined Element" allows you to link both the value and the states of a variable
simultaneously or individually (priority-controlled) to an element and to represent it as sum information. As
opposed to the "Multibin", the "Combined" element can also display symbols, texts or bitmaps.

Additionally, the element can be used to set the value of a bit variable or to execute a function. The “Combined
Element” can also be linked to a SICAM 230 command input.

When using the view type “Symbol from library”, you can use the symbol selection button to define link rules after
selecting the symbol. These substitution rules are saved for every status.
This means you can use the link rules to exchange all variables and functions.

The “Combined Element” provides different view types:

Symbol from library


The states are displayed with symbols from the general symbol library.

Status text
You can enter a text with foreground and background color for every status.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 33
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Bitmaps
You can select a picture file from the graphics directory for every state.

Picture symbol
You can define a picture symbol and a filling color for each status.

Topological coloring
If topology is activated, the element can also be colored topologically.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 34
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

States of the Combined element

The element is processed from the first value and status combination to the last entry. The first complete
coincidence is displayed, if the property "overlapping" (for symbols from the library) or "chained" (for texts) has not
been activated. The sequence of the verification can be defined and changed by the buttons "upwards" and
"downwards".

The status can be defined via numerical values, status bits, relational operators and formulas.

Test mode
The test mode simulates the Runtime: You can test the change of a value and see how your Combined Element
would behave during the Runtime.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 35
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

6.8. VBA/VSTA

VBA/VSTA is available as an integrated script language. It is based on the programming language


Visual Basic /C# and it is fully integrated into the application, offering program-specific functions in addition to the
Visual Basic functions. In the process control system, these functions allow you to access all information like
variable states, archives, pictures, lists, picture elements etc.

To avoid a cyclical polling of changing states, e.g. measured values, you can also choose an event-triggered
mode.

Two integration levels were implemented:

Function integrated:

The script is defined within a function, e.g. a dynamic element. As the dynamic element already has certain
properties like the variable reference, picture position etc., you only have to implement the functions in the script
that are required in addition to the element properties.

This allows you to extend elements like dynamic picture elements or set value dialogs project-specifically in a
simple way.
These extensions are reusable across projects without any adjustments.

Application oriented:

VBA allows you to implement complex cross-functional applications, because you can access all process control
system objects and the complete computer environment. You can integrate ActiveX-controls/WPF into the
process pictures. ActiveX-controls are prefabricated functions by third party manufacturers, like pie charts or
special curve representations. The connection between ActiveX X-controls and the process control system is
established via VBA/VSTA.

External access
The internal SICAM 230 objects (variables, archives etc.) can also be accessed by external programs, e.g. by
Visual Basic or MS Office programs. This requires the integration of the SICAM 230 object model, however.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 36
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

7. Installation
The software is provided on an installation DVD. Administrator rights are required for all installation types.

Before the installation, the setup program checks whether all necessary programs (e.g. NET framework) are
installed and installs any missing programs automatically. The database is automatically installed and configured.

Because of to the use of standard installation routines, no special skills are required for the installation.

The installation offers two options:

Runtime.

Only components required for visualization will be installed. No editor for the creation of projects will be installed.

The following modules will be installed:

• SICAM 230 Runtime


• Microsoft .NET Framework 4
• Codemeter dongle software

Development environment.

All components that are required for engineering and visualization will be installed.
The following modules will be installed:

• SICAM 230 Runtime


• SICAM 230 Editor
• Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2
• Microsoft .NET Framework 4
• Codemeter dongle software

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 37
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Webserver.

The optional Web server will be installed. The SICAM 230 Web server requires a conventional Web server
service like Microsoft Internet Information Server or Apache.

8. Updates / Hotfixes
SICAM 230 offers 2 different types of “Updates”.

8.1. Build

Builds are provided at regular intervals in addition to the service pack versions and contain urgent error
corrections.
Generally, builds do not contain any new functions and can be installed without re-installing the basic software.

You do not have to convert project backups to a newer version after a build installation.

Builds contain all error corrections of previous builds.

Builds are provided as single executable files.

8.2. Service packs

Service packs are provided at greater intervals than builds. Service packs contain all error corrections of previous
builds as well as function extensions.
Before installing a service pack, you need to uninstall the old version, because service packs are only available as
complete installations on a DVD.

Uninstalling the old SICAM 230 version will not remove any project data from the database, which is why all
projects will be available again after installing the new service pack installation. The project data will automatically
be converted to the new version after a security check. Before the conversion, a project backup of the old version
will be created.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 38
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

9. Server licenses

9.1. SRX licenses

The SRX license is the basic license for most of the other licenses. It contains the process connection, the archive
server, the network module and a fully-fledged visualization. The SRX license can be extended as required and
without limitations.

The following SRX versions are available:

• SRX 500 Basic (max. 500 data points, extend. trend and archive server in starter edition)
• SRX 750 (max. 750 data points)
• SRX 2500 (max. 2500 data points)
• SRX 5000 (max. 5000 data points)
• SRX (unlimited number of data points)

9.2. SRXR licenses

The SRXR licenses are bundle licenses consisting of 2 SRX licenses for the operation of a redundant server pair.

The following SRXR versions are available:

• SRXR 2500 (max. 2500 data points)


• SRXR 5000 (max. 5000 data points)
• SRXR (unlimited number of data points)

9.3. Prot licenses

The SICAM 230 Prot license is a server license with limited visualization capabilities. The Prot server is typically
used on-site as a pure event logging machine.
You can load only a picture of the type “Chronological Event List”. There is no limit for the number of data points
when connecting to the process.

Only the following drivers and functions are available:

• IEC 101/104
• IEC 61850
• Time control
• VBA
No other options or drivers are available.

Also, no SICAM network technology like client-server or redundancy is available.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 39
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

9.4. Gateway functionality

The SICAM 230 Server Gateway is a server license with limited visualization capabilities. The Server Gateway
can be used as an on-site logging machine, for example.
You can load only a picture of the type “Chronological Event List”.

There is no limit for the number of data points.

Only the following drivers and functions are available:

• IEC 101/104
• IEC 61850
• Time control
• VBA

Further drivers can be added. No further options are available.


Also, no SICAM network technology like server-client or redundancy is available.

9.5. Dedicated Server

The SICAM 230 Dedicated Server is a server license with limited visualization capabilities. You can load only a
picture of the type “Chronological Event List”.
Usually, the Dedicated Server is used in a server-client combination that provides visualization on the client only.
There is no limit for the number of data points.

All available drivers and options can be added to this setup.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 40
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

10. SICAM 230 embedded Version


SICAM 230 embedded Version is a runtime license. The engineering process must be performed on a PC with a
conventional SICAM 230 Editor license.

Features:

• optimized for touch panels


• Windows 7, Windows XP
• 1024 or 2048 datapoints
• Network technologies (Server-Client)
• Webserver pro Basic (optional)
• archives & extended trend starter edition (optional)
• available drivers: IEC 60870-5-104/101, IEC 61860

The following limitations apply with SICAM 230 embedded Version:

• no additional modules
• no redundancy
• no multi-hierarchy projects
• no VBA/VSTA support

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 41
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11. Process connection

11.1. General

11.1.1. Status of process data

Beside the status information generated by the SICAM 1703 system, the SICAM 230 communication server
processes further system and user status information. A 32 bit word is available for the status of every process
variable. Status bits concerning the system and users can be stored in a fail-safe way.

Handling of invalid values


The handling of invalid values can be defined separately for every process variable. You can choose from three
different mechanisms. The invalid bit of the process variable (I-Bit) will remain unchanged in every case.

• Automatic switch to a predefined replacement value


• Continued use of the last valid value
• No handling of invalid values

Manual correction
Process variables that are not telecommunicated can be corrected manually. Optionally, you can also choose to
initialize the last valid status of the variable as an input for the manual value when activating manual correction.

Revision bit
Process variables can be set to revision. If this status is active, alarms and setting of commands are suppressed
by the process control system. Additionally, you can choose to perform a command input to the current state that
is interlocked for the commands “ON” and “OFF” in default operation mode.

Select bit
The status select is used for the selection of a command object in the process control system. If this status is
active, a new command access (e.g. from another working station) can be locked.

Display of desired direction


The desired direction display in combination with the command element displays the desired status of switching
elements. It is set as a status of the response variable. The desired direction display is reset on receiving the
according response. The status can only be set for the response stati "ON" and "OFF".

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 42
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Runtime exceeded
The status “Runtime exceeded” is set by the command element if the runtime of a switching element is exceeded.
The reset is done by a change of the confirmation or another command set.

Status – “not real-time correct”


This status is added to the chronological real-time data from the SICAM 1703, if they are no longer chronological
due to system errors. In this case, the time stamping will be performed by the SICAM 230 driver.

User status
The 8 user status bits can be defined project-specifically. Examples for user states are: special interlocking
conditions for command input, message locks etc.

Data point not updated


This status serves as a flag for the integrity check of counting values

Diagnostic and service functions


The SICAM 230 communication server provides diagnostic and service functions that support the startup and
maintenance of the communication interface. These functions include:

• Logging tool with filter functions


• Readout of the current process image information of variables
• Recording and playback operation
• System error messages in plain text
• Logging of system messages

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 43
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.2. AK driver IEC 60870-5-101/104

The AK server is used for connecting SICAM 230 to remote control devices via the IEC101 (serial) protocol or the
IEC104 (Ethernet) protocol

The AK driver supports a maximum of 4 serial connections (IEC 101). When connecting via TCP/IP, the driver
supports a maximum of 256 connections.

Process data points


The project data points can be modeled and edited via the Toolbox II OPMII.

The OPM generates a PVL file in the XML format, which can be sent to the AK driver via the SICAM 230 Editor /
Variables / Import XML.

Virtual data points


Virtual data points show status information about connected remote control devices.

The following virtual data points are available:

• Watchdog
• GA activation
• Status of the communication connection
• End of initialization
• Polling of the counter groups

11.2.1. Disposal of fault signal records

The application SICAM Disto for the disposal of fault signal records can be integrated via the AK driver.

11.2.2. Test and error search

The AK server provides service functions for testing and error search.

Error protocol
Errors are displayed directly in the driver window. Errors can be filtered by error classes.
Additionally, all errors are stored in detail in a log file.

Logging
The function “Logging” allows you to display received and sent 101/104 telegrams in plain text. Telegrams can be
filtered by incoming/outgoing, PA and TTA. The protocol can also be written to a text file.

Substitute value input


The function “Input of substitute values” for simulation and test allows you to switch variables to substitute values
or to define a new substitute value.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 44
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Display of process image


Display of the complete process image or single data points with their current state, value, status and time stamp.

The service functions can be activated during live operation without restarting.

GA
You can trigger a GA to all connected stations or station-selective via a virtual send data point.

Set time
SICAM 230 can have its time set via the first IEC 60870-5-101/104 connection by a remote control device.

Redundancy
2 remote control heads can be combined into a group for redundant operation.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 45
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.3. IEC 61850

The IEC 61850 client is used for the connection of IEC 61850 servers to SICAM 230m
using Ethernet (10/100 Mbit) as the interface and TCP/IP as the protocol.

The IEC 61850 driver supports up to 500 simultaneous connections.

Upon request, further ACSI services, common data classes and data attributes can be implemented. Logical
nodes and data objects can be parameterized via private extensions of logical nodes.

Further characteristics:

• SBO - Select before Operate


• Logging of remote commands
• Redundancy (only SICAM 1703)

Process data points


The project data points can be modeled and edited via the Toolbox II OPMII.

The OPM generates a PVL file in the XML format, which can be sent to the IEC 61850 driver via the SICAM 230
Editor / Variables / Import XML.

Virtual data points


Virtual data points show status information about connected remote control devices.

The following virtual data points are available:

• Status of the communication connection


• GA activation
• Status of message lock
• Start and stop of the Goose message
• Address of origin

11.3.1. Disposal of fault signal records

The application SICAM Disto for the disposal of fault signal records can be integrated via the IEC 61850 driver.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 46
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.3.2. Test and error search

Diagnostic information
Diagnostic information is displayed in the driver window. Via a configuration file, you can configure which
diagnostic information will be displayed.

Logging
The function “Logging” allows you to display received and sent IEC 61850 telegrams in plain text. Double-click on
a telegram to display the telegram status.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 47
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.4. Mathematics driver

The mathematics driver is used for defining formulas (linkage type of arithmetics, trigonometry, etc.) and
calculating them by using the data from other process drivers. From the point of view of SICAM 230, the
Mathematics driver is a "normal" process driver. Variables are defined in the Editor (mathematics variables). The
calculated values of the Mathematics variables are provided for online operation.

Formulas can be entered as Float formulas or as Bit formulas:

Float formulas:

Enter directly in the section "Formulas"

or

Select a variable in the window “Variable definition” and select a formula type by clicking on the corresponding
buttons for functions in the section “Formula definition”.

Bit formulas:

Enter directly in the section “Formulas” after selecting Boolean algebra. If the variable was created as a binary
variable, you will only be able to use Boolean algebra.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 48
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.5. System driver

The SICAM 230 system driver is used for reading out internal project information, network information, hardware
information of the PC etc.

System driver variables for the following areas are available:

• Alarms
• Archive Server
• User administration
• Printers
• Hardware resources
• Network
• System folder
• Performance network
• Performance driver
• Project Information
• Recipes
• System information

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 49
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

11.6. Further Drivers

More than 100 other drivers for connecting remote control devices to SICAM 230 are available.

Here is a selection of available drivers:

• Siemens S7 TCP-IP
• Siemens S5 TCP-IP
• Profibus DP
• BACNET
• OPC Client
• OPC UA Client
• Modbus RTU and TCP
• DDE Client
• SQL driver

11.7. Allocations

Allocations allow you to automatically assign the value of a piece of process information (variable of a driver) to
another variable.

This way, you can write values from the PLC directly into an SQL-database or to write spontaneous value
changes from one communication interface (driver) to a second driver.

With allocations, the technical value of a source variable is transferred to a target variable. The source variable
and the target variable can belong to different drivers.

The value is transferred spontaneously after every change. Additionally, allocations can also be initiated via a
trigger variable.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 50
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12. Basic components

12.1. Functions

12.1.1. Standard functions

The user can operate SICAM 230 via user-defined project functions. All functions used in a project are based on
the existing system functions. These are pre-defined macros that are easy to use and parameterize by the user.

SICAM 230 provides functions for the following categories:

• Alarm and Event


• Application
• Archive
• Picture
• Message
• Network
• Password
• Report
• Recipe
• Script
• Variable
• VBA
• Windows

The following section will describe two examples of standard


functions: picture switch and export archives.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 51
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.1.2. Picture switch

Picture switch is the most frequently used function in SICAM 230. This function opens a selected picture.
Optionally, a dialog for the user can be opened before that.

The picture switch function can be applied to every existing picture. The picture will be loaded in the associated
template.

For all predefined picture types in list form (AML, CEL, status list, archive edit …), a filter dialog will automatically
be displayed.

This dialog allows you to load the same picture several times, but with different filter settings (e.g. AML for
different alarm areas).

Another option allows you to load the AML for a certain day or time span during the Runtime via a calendar
dialog.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 52
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.1.3. Export archives

This function is used to export the entries recorded in an archive to a file.

Provide the file configuration (name, path, formatting, etc.), the archive and the time filter as the transfer
parameters. This function is configured via an input dialog.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 53
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.1.4. Scripts

If you need to execute several functions in a certain


sequence, you can combine them in a script.

There are several predefined scripts in the system that


are executed automatically:

• AUTOSTART
• AUTOEND
• AUTOSTART CLIENT
• AUTOEND CLIENT
• AUTOSTART SERVER
• AUTOEND SERVER

12.2. Alarm management

Alarming is used to draw attention to critical process events and to support the user in localizing and eliminating
them.

Alarms that have occurred are displayed in a alarm message list and in the alarm status line.
Additionally, optical and acoustical signals can be used (e.g. flashing text on the screen, activation of external
network signal-horns etc.).

The additional Message Control module allows you to send notifications about critical alarms via SMS/Email or
voice message.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 54
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.3. Rema/Limits

There are two ways of triggering an alarm.

Reaction matrices and limits cause a reaction as soon as a limit or a status is violated or reached.

Limits
Limits are either defined in the Editor or adjust variably depending on the value of a variable in the Runtime. For
every data point, you can define several limits (e.g. Max/Min) that trigger an alarm if the associated values go
above or below them.

• Status text describing specific states (On, Off, Limit) for the use in lists and logs
• Status color defining the display of states in other functions (e.g. limit coloring)
• Function calls for the status-based execution of functions – spontaneous or by executing them via
the alarm message list (e.g. for selecting pictures)
• Assignment to an alarm group (1 - 256) for the technological selection of alarms in the lists
• Assignment to an alarm class (1 - 256) for prioritizing alarms for picture alarming and the selection of
alarms in the lists
• Obligatory acknowledgement and deletion for alarm processing
• Entry into the chronological event list
• Flashing display in the process pictures
• Print output to the running log
• Definition of up to four limits per value variable with a static or dynamic limit, which can be defined
via a limit variable
• Definition of a delay time until the triggering of the alarm
• Definition of hours and operation counters

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 55
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Reaction matrices
You can define a reaction behavior in reaction matrices and then assign them to multiple variables.

Reaction matrices are required if many process variables have the same status definition and if you want to be
able to change this definition centrally.

Besides that, reaction matrices have a number of advantages:

• You can define up to 256 analog or binary states that you want to monitor
• The status of the process variables can be additionally monitored.
• Analog limits can be defined via “less than, greater than, equals and interval”.
• Monitoring of edge changes.
• Status changes can be hidden from monitoring.
• State and status bits can be moved to other status bits
• The update of process variables can be switched off via user states.
• The status definition can be tested during the parameterization in the Editor.
• The reaction matrices can be imported and exported, allowing them to be reused.
• Definition of hours and operation counters.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 56
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.4. Alarm List

The alarm message lists allow the user to look up process and system events, sorted chronologically or by priority
in a line-based list.

These lists provide the following functions:

• Acknowledge one/page/all
• Delete one/page/all
• Export
• List print
• Filter
• Predefined filters via picture call

Possible filter criteria are:

• Time filter for time interval, relative time, daily/monthly/yearly filter. A calendar is available for
daily/monthly/yearly filters, which can be used to select the required time interval in a comfortable
way
• Filters can be saved as profiles for reuse during online operation
• Text filter for channel name and long text
• Filter by alarm groups and classes
• Max. number of entries
• Project-specific filters can be defined for distributed control systems
• A comment with a maximum of 80 characters can be defined for the selected alarm message line via
an input field. When reusing the entry, it will be shown in the input field. The comment is stored in the
alarm archive.
• The total number of entries is available as a display element

Alarm areas
The alarm area function allows you to analyze the state of a class depending on the alarm area.

Alarm classes and alarm groups


Alarm groups and alarm classes can be used for the logical grouping of alarms.

Alarm classes are used for assigning priorities (e.g. alarm, malfunction, warning).

Alarm groups are used for discriminating technological categories (e.g. electricity 20kV, gas, water…)

A name, a number, a color, a function and a status variable can be assigned to each group or class.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 57
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.5. Picture alarming

The dynamic element “Picture alarming” sums up the alarm classes over picture hierarchies or over the entire
alarm administration and displays the sum in the form of an animated picture selection button.
There is no need to parameterize a separate collective message.

The summation over picture hierarchies includes the picture alarm elements of all subordinate pictures.

The characters are displayed in the color of the alarm class when alarms of the assigned class occur. Currently
unacknowledged alarms are displayed as flashing. Historical unacknowledged alarms are displayed flashing in
the text color of the button.

Mapping to variable
Additionally, the status of the picture alarming element can be mapped onto a 32 Bit variable. Two bits each are
used per alarm class for the status and the blinking status.

Example:

01|00| … |10| 11| 00| 01


Alarmclass 1
0|1
Alarmclass 2
0=acknowledged 0=Alarm not activ
Alarmclass 3
1=unacknowledged 1=Alarm activ
Alarmclass 15
Alarmclass 16

This allows you to graphically display picture alarming information, independent of the picture alarming element.
Additionally, you can process alarm information (e.g. all alarms in the system acknowledged) and display it
externally.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 58
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.6. Chronological Event List

The chronological event list (CEL) is used for logging all process and system events as well as all operating
actions. It processes both chronological real-time data and non-real-time data that was time-stamped in the
process control system.

The list is sorted chronologically after reloading the CEL or by manually starting the sorting process. In order to
tell apart the sorted and unsorted parts of the list, they are displayed in different colors. The position and size of
the system window is defined via the associated picture template.

There are a number of parameterizable command elements for the operation and display of the CEL:

• Scroll through the list with a scroll bar or via definable buttons for next/previous picture or line.
• Function call (e.g. direct picture selection) for functions that have been shared in the configuration of
the process variable.
• Stop the current update for scrolling in the list
• Print the current list content considering the activated filters
• Create selective lists via filter conditions. The filters are available in the configuration for the list
selection and during online operation. Filters can be saved as profiles for reuse during online
operation.

Possible filter criteria are:

• Time filter for time interval, relative time, daily/monthly/yearly filter. A calendar is available for
daily/monthly/yearly filters, which can be used to select the required time interval in a comfortable
way
• Text filter for channel name and long text
• Filter by alarm groups and classes
• Max. number of entries
• Project-specific filters can be defined for distributed control systems
• A comment with a maximum of 80 characters can be defined for the selected alarm message line via
an input field. When reusing the entry, it will be shown in the input field. The comment is stored in the
alarm archive.
• Function for manual resorting of the list contents. Unsorted entries are highlighted with a different
color
• The total number of entries is available as a display element

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 59
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.7. User administration

The user administration allows you to lock and unlock command actions depending on the user that is logged in.

You can define users and user groups. You can allocate user groups to a user.

You can assign different authorization groups to user actions or picture elements.

For a better overview, you can assign names to the 128 different authorization groups.

User can be created and managed both in the Editor and the Runtime.

Features:

• Manual or automatic lock of users (e.g. after invalid password inputs)


• Definition of minimum password length
• Temporary login
• Integration of ActiveDirectory users
• Selective user rights with 128 authorization groups
• Configurable maximum number of invalid username/password inputs
• Configurable max. validity of password
• Auto logout after a configurable time without any user action
• Signature entries in CEL for user actions

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 60
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.8. System pictures

The SICAM 230 control system offers a variety of predefined picture types, which can be equipped e.g. with
default control elements.

• Alarm message lists


• Chronological event lists
• ASCII files (e.g. notes)
• Extended trend curves
• Archive revision
• Log generator (Option)
• Secure command initiation
• Recipes
• Browser window for displaying HTML information
• Video sources
• Login window
• Screen keyboards and set value windows
• Status log

Filter conditions that can be defined either in the Editor or the Runtime can be used to adjust the system windows
(e.g. time interval and variable selection for an extended trend curve) to different requirements. In addition to the
operating and display elements, you can integrate static and dynamic elements of the process pictures in the
system windows.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 61
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.9. World view

A world view is a process picture that is larger than the available screen size. The following technologies and
tools are available:

• Navigation window / station list


• Zooming
• Decluttering (hiding details depending on the zoom level)
• Panning (moving the screen content)

Navigation window / station list


The navigation window always displays a small version of the complete world view. The currently visible area is
surrounded by a rectangle. This rectangle can also be used for panning and zooming the world view.

Picture elements like local network stations have a property called “Name for object list”, which can be used for
showing elements in the station list.

You can also define a part of the variable name as the “Name”. This way, the station list fills up automatically
when additional local network stations are inserted.

Select an entry in the station list to center the world view on that object. Additionally, you can display a circle that
zooms in around the object when you select it. This increases the overview, especially for small views or when
text is no longer readable.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 62
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Zooming
You can zoom in different ways:

• With the rectangle in the navigation window


• With the scroll bar in the navigation window
• With predefined functions placed onto buttons or function keys.

Decluttering
“Decluttering” refers to the hiding and showing of picture contents depending on the selected zoom level.

This way, a local network station can be displayed as a circle when zooming far out, for example. When zooming
in, more and more details appear, e.g. circuit breakers.

You can define any number of zoom levels and associate them with absolute zoom values in percent.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 63
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Panning
Panning (moving the picture content) can be used in different ways:

• With the rectangle in the navigation window


• In the world view while pressing and holding the middle mouse button

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 64
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.10. Command input

The command input is use for secure, multi-level inputs of commands (set values) and status manipulations. This
element can be used in its standard configuration or as a special element for railways (DB AG, ÖBB etc.).

The command input offers the following basic functions:

• One or two level command execution, two-handed operation for the button “Execute” via a
combination of the mouse button and the ENTER key.
• Command input with runtime monitoring. The runtime monitoring is reset when messages are
changed or after another command input.
• Display of desired direction, i.e. desired directions can be displayed for switching elements in the
process picture based on the responses ON and OFF.
• Combined command input with up to 5 command elements (e.g. ON, OFF, OPEN, CLOSE, STOP) in
one input window.
• Display of the variable name or the long text of the command variable and the current state of the
response.
• Optionally hide entries in the event list.
• Set value inputs
• Status inputs, e.g. revision, replacement value, locked …
• If the status bit “Revision” is set, the interlocking is set to the current state, runtime monitoring and
the display of the desired direction.

There are four different ways of entering command inputs:

• Context menu with standard dialogs


• Command input element and pictures of the type set value input/status input
• Context menu with pictures of the type set value input/status input
• Customer-specific command input (scripting)

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 65
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.10.1. Context menu with standard dialogs

Commands can be sent via a Windows standard context menu that is linked to a dynamic element. The menu
items are generated from the actions configured in the associated command interlocking. Additional commands or
functions can be added. Standard windows are available for the two-step command input and interlocking
messages.

Illustration: Context menu

After selecting a command in the context menu, a dialog is displayed for confirming that action (optional 2nd step)

After the confirmation, the interlocking conditions are checked. This includes the interlockings defined in the
interlocking element and the interlockings derived from the topology. If none of the interlockings is violated, the
command will be sent and the dialog will be closed.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 66
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

If one of the interlocking conditions apply, they will be displayed in a window. Every interlocking contains a plain
text. In the project configuration, you can specify whether an interlocking may be unlocked by the user or not.

Illustration: Interlocking dialog

After unlocking all interlockings, a dialog for finishing the command input and sending the command will be
displayed.

Illustration: Execute

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 67
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.10.2. Command input element and pictures of the type set value input/status input

Command inputs can be made via an MDI window of the type command input, which is dynamically loaded by a
command element. As opposed to command input via the context menu, where the selection menu and the input
dialogs are loaded next to the selected equipment and may therefore cover other equipment pictures, this method
uses normal pictures of the type set value input/status input, whose position on the screen can be predefined.
e.g.: you can reserve an area in the menu bar for these dialogs.

The following example shows one possible solution:

Branch without active command input Selection of the switching direction

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 68
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Branch interlocking Execution

12.10.3. Context menu with pictures of the type set value input/status input

The two methods of command input presented above can also be combined, i.e. the context menu can be used
for selecting the action. For all other dialogs, you can use pictures of the type set value input/status input. These
pictures can be loaded either at a predefined or at a relative position.

12.10.4. Customer-specific command input (scripting)

If the process requires a special type of command input, which cannot be realized with the usual mechanisms, a
specific command input (so-called scripting command input) can be designed for the customer.

Contact the SICAM 230 product management for any such requests.

12.11. Status list

The status log is used for the display and manipulation of variables. The status log is a picture type including the
associated MDI control elements. The statuses of the variables can be manipulated.

12.12. Status test

By using a “variables status test” picture, variables can be displayed and set in the Runtime.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 69
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.13. Counter groups

The module “Counter groups” is used for processing and analyzing counter information. It supports absolute and
relative counter input values.

Values can be calculated absolutely or relatively.

Features:

• Cyclical counter reading transmission by the remote device


• Cyclical counter reading query by the control system
• Tariff recognition
• Trigger variables support
• Support of counter query PVs

12.14. Menus and context menus

Windows-based menus guarantee an intuitive handling and allow you to design user-friendly projects. SICAM 230
supports two types of menus.

Main menus:

Main menus are displayed on the top border of the SICAM 230 Runtime.

Context menus
Context menus are opened with the right mouse button in the Runtime. Their contents depend on the location on
the screen that the right mouse button is clicked on (i.e. on the dynamic element).

The remarkable thing about this: the functionality is adjusted at the object. This way, it is not necessary to design
a new context menu for every object. For example, you can adjust directly at the object which help chapter you
want to open.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 70
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.15. Time control

In the time control, you can define all function calls that should be executed at a defined (fixed) time or cyclically.
This way, important production data can be saved daily on a network drive, for example.

12.16. Online language switch

The Runtime offers language and unit switching into any number of languages. This way, projects can be
internationalized at the press of a button – customer engineers around the world can orient themselves
immediately.

All texts, including the standard dialog texts, can be switched online. With SICAM 230 being a complete Unicode
application, Asian and Arabic languages can be used without any problems. Even the font and its characteristics
(size, font type) can be switched with the language.

By switching the language, paths for other language-related files like HTML pages, sounds and video files, and
project related help are automatically switched.

Changes in the language tables can be transferred to the target system without stopping the Runtime. Even for
the audio response via the module “Message Control“, multi-lingual “language engines” are at your disposal.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 71
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.17. Multi-monitor

You can use the SICAM 230 monitor administration to define for each workplace if the target system of the project
is equipped with one or multiple monitors.
A maximum number of 4 monitors is supported.

The SICAM 230 monitor administration brings together the most diverse environments in only one project. That
means:

• no additional effort with single and multiple monitor projects in the network.
• no cost intensive adaptation to various monitor resolutions.
Multiple display setups (monitor profiles) for different PC systems deliver projects to different monitor types
without any problems.

For example: In a control center, the project is displayed on a four-monitor system, while on the maintenance
laptop, the same project can be controlled with just one monitor.

An additional plus of the SICAM 230 monitor administration: the relative picture call. The picture is displayed on
the monitor on which it was called. Furthermore, the monitor on which the picture is displayed can also be
exclusively defined. In addition to the Runtime, a monitor selection can be shown. The user can use it to select
the monitor on which he wants to display the picture.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 72
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.18. Archiving

The archiving of measurands and counter readings in the process control system works according to the principle
of archive cascading, i.e. follow-up archives (e.g. daily archives) access previous archives (e.g. hourly archives)
via aggregating functions.

The following aggregating functions over the archiving cycle per archive variable are variable:

• Summation
• Average
• Minimum
• Maximum

The archive contents can be evaluated and processed via the Extended Trend, the Report Generator or the
Archive Revision window.

There are different types of archiving. The following triggers for the entries into the archives are available:

Cyclical
Writing values to the archive is triggered by a predefined cycle. The maximum scan rate for cyclical archives is
one second.

Event-triggered
Writing values to the archive is triggered by a defined bit variable.

Spontaneous
Writing values to the archive is triggered by a value change of one of the linked variables, i.e. the number of
archived values depends on the frequency of change. The definition of a hysteresis for the variables can
decrease the frequency.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 73
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.18.1. Archive export

There are several ways of exporting an archive cycle.

Database
Ring store for each archive, in which the defined number of archive cycles is stored; post processing of the
archive data within the ring; upon overflow of the ring store, optionally discard archive or export to file.

File export
After closing an archive cycle, it will immediately be exported to a file.

Export function
The archive export i.e. the saving of archives to files with time filter, is done in standard file formats (ASCII,
dBase, XML, SQL). The file names are issued independently from the system. The structure
(YYMMDDhhmmsst/XML) encodes the export time with an identifier for archive, year, month, day, hour, minute
and second. Files can be stored both locally and on a file server.

12.18.2. Archive modification

The values stored in a ring buffer can be revised later. Changed values receive the status “Manual value”.
Changes can also be updated in the aggregated follow-up archives via an update function. There is a separate
archive edit window or (optionally) the log generator, which you can use to revise archive contents.

The following control elements are available in the archive edit window:

• Scroll bars for scrolling in the archive list


• Format definition for list structure
• Filter conditions for creating selective archive lists. The filters are available both in the configuration
for the list selection and during online operation.
Possible filter criteria are:
• Archive selection
• Time interval or relative time
• Selection of variable names
• Selection of status information
• Sorting of the archive list by variable name or date/time
• Inserting of archive entries
• Changing of archive entries and revision of follow-up achives
• Output of window contents to printer

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 74
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

12.19. Extended Trend

Trend curves can be configured via the filters in the picture selection function, which can be changed online.

You can choose to display either values from the short-term trend buffers or archive values. You can change
these properties during online operation and store them in a profile. Once stored, you can load these profiles at
any time.
The curve window offers the following functions:

• Online selection of the values displayed in the curve from a predefined variable library
• You can define a separate value axis with technological scaling for every process variable. You can
choose either linear or logarithmic scaling
• Interpolation
• x/y value representation
• Online selection of the displayed interval via zoom windows, calendar, scrolling functions or by
defining an absolute or relative time interval
• Pointer function with display window for date/time, variable name, current value, unit and status;
display of the limit text after limit violation
• Show/hide grid lines
• Magnifying glass for the value range of the variables
• Change parameters like color, frames, line width/type and axis intervals
• Hardcopy of the curve without control elements and output to printer or to the clipboard for
documentation purposes
• Display of two time intervals, e.g. current day and last day

Abbildung: Das Kurvenfenster

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 75
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13. Options

13.1. Topological coloring (Topology)

Besides the topological coloring of the electrical connections between the network elements and the topological
command interlocking, the purpose of this module is to derive the required parameters for the description of the
topological network interrelations and their documentation from the displayed pictures.

The topological states of the network determine the color of the lines:

• Connected
• Disconnected
• Grounded
• Currently triggered
• Network or source coupling

You can define a separate color for every source. If different sources are coupled, the connections can be
displayed with dashed colors. A maximum of two colors can be used. These two colors are taken from the two
sources with the highest priority.

Furthermore, different supply states can be signalized with the width of the lines.
• Normal width: Supply not protected (only via one line)
• Extra width: Supply protected (via at least 2 lines)
Examples:

A
C

B
D

NLS05.DRW

• A: “protected and coupled”


2 power supplies are coupled via this branch (amongst others)
• B: “unprotected and coupled”
2 networks are coupled at a different location in the network and there is no bilateral supply.
• C: “protected”
A branch is supplied from two sides but only by one source.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 76
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

• D: "unprotected“
There is only a unilateral supply.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 77
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Topological interlocking
Up to 43 interlocking conditions can be generated from the topology and analyzed. For this analysis, you can
define at a central spot which conditions will be checked and which of the analyzed conditions can be unlocked by
the operator.

To avoid switching errors, switching commands are checked against interlocking conditions. The following checks
are usually performed:

• Disconnector under load


• Voltage towards end
• Consumer switch-off
• Network coupling
• Network isles

Interlockings that cannot be automatically derived from the topology (e.g. remote), can be created and managed
centrally (see also command input chapter). There are references to this interlocking in the data model.

Interlocking conditions are displayed in plain text. If they are unlocked, a record to the Chronological Event List
will be made.

Topology from graphics


The topological connection of the electrical network elements will be derived automatically from the system
picture.

If there are any logical errors, the user will be guided to the error location automatically.

Edges
Besides the normal line color representing the supply status, you can also configure a so-called “edges”. This
edge allows you to visualize additional information, e.g. source/consumer search.

Source/consumer search
The topological search functions for sources and consumers can be integrated in the context menu of equipment,
for example.

When searching for sources, all lines from the selected equipment to the supplying source will be “bordered”.
When there are multiple sources (coupled supply), only the first path that is found will be displayed.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 78
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.2. Error location from protection device

The module “Error location from protection device” allows you to graphically display the possible location(s) of a
short circuit in the network world view. This feature requires:

• Digital protection devices that are connected online to the control system and provide the reactance
of the short-circuit.
• The complete network must be in one picture (world view).
• Line data (reactance values) of the lines between 2 municipal network stations
• The option “Topological coloring” (Topology)

The line data is stored directly in the picture editor as a property of the line.

The data of the protection device, the embedded line data from the topology and the current switching status of
the network is used to visualize the possible error location(s) in the network picture.

This display allows for a fast error analysis. It is not a substitute for an exact error search on the spot. The goal is
to find out the municipal network stations between which the short-circuit has occurred. This speeds up the error
search and the re-supply of the customer. The picture below shows an exact error location. It is marked by a blue
circle on the line. The color can be defined separately for every protection device.

Illustration: Error location

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 79
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

The module supports both parallel lines and intermeshed networks. The picture below shows a situation where a
short-circuit has occurred in a closed ring. The two affected protection devices (black and green) each deliver a
reactance value (reactive part of impedance in linear networks). The picture shows two possible error locations for
every reactance value. The combination of the two displays results in an exact location.

Illustration: Error location

For strongly intermeshed networks, the use of central node stations with remote-controlled short-circuit indicators
is recommended. This speeds up the search for error locations when there are several possible locations.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 80
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.3. Current distribution calculation

The deployment and expansion of renewable energies is accompanied by shifts in the direction of the energy
flow. On certain days, energy may be fed from cities and towns back into the high-voltage grid of upstream energy
companies.

Public utilities typically lack the tools needed to properly calculate the flow in demand. SICAM 230 calculates
energy distribution using a simplified, single-phase, strictly ohmic model without the phase angle. During the
multi-step command, the system calculates the future grid status and alarms the user if there is a risk of overload.

If you also wish to see which switching actions make sense in such situations, the “Simulation” add-on module
lets you run various scenarios in advance to preview the expected energy distribution offline. This gives you the
basic tools you need to face the key challenges of the energy future.

13.4. Switching administration module

If your company is in the business of operating electrical grids, you and your partners need the reliable support of
the SICAM 230 to manage switching records.

From request to approval and planning to implementation, all the necessary transactions are displayed in one
user-friendly workflow and are seamlessly documented. The layouts and documentation expressions can be
easily customized in Microsoft Word.

And as always, you use the convenient SICAM 230 user administration interface to define which users have
which authorizations.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 81
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.5. Report generator

The report generator documents, evaluates and presents process data on the basis of online and archive data.
About 150 functions are available for the calculation and the output of data. Manual import is possible, also
reading and writing of values.

13.6. Easy Energy Reports

Flexible reporting is an essential component of any control system. SICAM 230’s Easy Energy Reporting requires
no special expertise. Standardized layouts based on Microsoft Excel are available for all areas, so producing gas,
water, and electricity reports is a snap. Use daily, monthly, or annual logs to generate manual or cyclical reports
from the SICAM 230 archive – even save them directly to PDF.

In addition to the reports, SICAM 230 also offers an archive editor with the following features:

• Manual correction of corrupted / invalid archive data


• Linear interpolation
• Copy and paste function for archive data

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 82
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.7. Message Control

The task of this module is sending messages to different recipients or the shift personnel as SMS. Voice Message
or eMail. Sending is executed with a function. A message can be linked to the limit of a variable, for example.
When the limit is violated, the message is sent to the defined recipient(s).

The messages can be sent with the following transfer media:

• ISDN card
• SMS via GSM hardware (mobile or GSM modem)
• Email
• Voice message
Positive and negative communication is logged in the Chronologic Event List (CEL).

13.7.1. Text-to-speech

Limit texts as well as every other dynamic text can be read out loud to the user by the system. The program offers
the following languages:

• German • English (US, UK, Indian)


• French • Spanish

13.8. Network manager (NWM)

Remote control networks use a large number of network components like hubs, switches, routers, printer servers,
terminal servers etc.

In order to maintain a high availability and to find errors fast, monitoring these network components is an integral
part of the control system.

The network is monitored with the SNMP protocol (SNMP = Simple Network Management Protocol), which is
based on TCP/IP. Based on the standardized SNMP protocol, all relevant data like status, performance, error,
alarms, reports etc. is transmitted.

The resulting messages are signalized by the control system with normal process variables and are available in
the same way as external process information (further processing is possible, like displaying in pictures, lists,
curves, alarming etc.).

Monitoring redundant network structures requires special network management, because a simple failure is often
not recognized.

The Network Manager option offers the following functions / features:

• Automatic recognition of all available SNMP agents


• Monitoring of non-SNMP-compliant components via cyclical ping
• Agent query via ping from the driver user interface

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 83
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

• Readout MIB information supported by the agent


• Selective display of MIBs per agent
• Selective cycle times for polling can be configured for every agent
• Direct read of MIB information in the driver for test tasks
• Invalid bit for variables of non-available agents
• Comfortable copy functions for existing agents
• Forwarding of management data systems further processing this data, e.g. automation systems like
SICAM 1703, via a number of available system connections
• Evaluation of traps (spontaneous information)
• Support of SNMPv1/v2c and v3

If devices with v3 are used, additional functions are available:

• Encrypted data transmission


• Infrastructure for key transmission and storage
• Authentification
• Mechanisms for access control

13.9. OPC DA Server

The OPC server makes the variables of the project available for standard OPC client tools.

All OPC specifications from 1.0a to 2.0 are supported with synchronous as well as asynchronous communication.

The OPC server and the OPC client must be installed locally on the same computer.

For network access, OPC tunneling software is required.

13.10. OPC UA Server

The OPC UA server makes the variables of the project available for standard OPC UA clients.

UA Security consists of authentication and authorization, encryption and data integrity via signatures.

13.11. SQL Server

The system can communicate with an external SQL server.

An SQL connection is the universal interface for databases:

• Current process data


• Cyclical archive data

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 84
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

• Event archives

13.12. Switching sequences and simulation

The control system allows you to automatically execute switching sequences. This includes the check of all
interlockings, as is the case for manual operation. A step will be executed only after the previous step has been
finished successfully.

There is a “switching sequence recorder” that can be used for storing switching sequences. Additionally, the
recorded switching sequences can be modified via an editor.

You can also switch client workstations to simulation mode. In simulation mode, the connection to the real
process is interrupted. When changing to simulation mode, you can choose whether you wish to use the current
process state or a previously stored “snapshot” as the basis for the simulation. Command inputs will automatically
be mirrored to the responses. This requires the use of the interlocking object.

Simulation mode is perfect for testing planned switching sequences. Simulation mode can be activated for every
client workstation.

The process state copies used by simulation mode can be stored and loaded at any time.

Testing switching sequences is a special application of simulation mode.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 85
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.13. EMS

The task of an energy management system (EMS) is to optimize the economic management of power supply
companies (PSC) or industrial firms. The most important tool for this is energy trend calculation, which serves as
the basis for an automated energy supply optimization.

The goal of economic management in electricity and gas supply is to receive a maximum amount of energy from
the supplier and deliver it to the customers while keeping the supply price low. Costs can be saved by avoiding
supply peaks.
Supply peaks can be reduced with targeted control actions, e.g. load rejection for switchable consumers or input
from own generators.

This requires a forecast of the average capacity during a measuring period in order to recognize an imminent
violation of the defined supply limits and react accordingly.

Usual measuring periods are:

• Electricity: 15 min
• Gas: 1h

Mode of operation of the EMS system


The modes of operation for gas and electricity are similar. However, as it is impossible to store electricity in large
amounts, the supply conditions of electricity delivery are adapted to this circumstance. In the natural gas area, not
only the contract conditions must be adhered to but it is also necessary to make arrangements in order to store
the natural gas. In most of the cases, this requires one system for medium-term forecasts (days/weeks) and one
for long-term forecasts (months/years). One example for this is SIEMENS Prophet Solution.

The EMS does not calculate any forecasts; it only calculates a trend for the current billing period.

Delay time
ON Delay time
OFF

Forewarning Forewarning
ON OFF

Command initiation ON Command initiation OFF

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 86
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Mode of operation with electricity


The measuring period for the supply with electrical power is usually 15 minutes. During this time, the averaged
power received at the hand-over point - from here on it is referred to as power or load - resp. the equivalent
amount of energy is determined and recorded.

The average power during the measuring period, which is used to calculate the price, can be reduced when
corresponding peak power consumptions are limited due to pointedly controlled interventions. This very short-
term optimization can be achieved by the following interventions:

• Load rejection by switchable consumers


• Increasing input of own generators

The goal of this optimization is to not exceed the contractually agree limit for the power in a measuring period
under any circumstances. Additionally, the energy consumption should stay very close below the set limit in order
to receive as much energy as possible.

Mode of operation with gas


For gas supply, the measuring period is usually an hour. During this time the determined amount of gas at the
hand-over point is rated. As is the case for electricity, a high price is the consequence if the limit is exceeded. The
definition of the price when the limit is exceeded is much more specific than in the electricity area. Basically, it is
also a goal to not exceed the agreed limit.

Possible interventions are the following:

• Load rejection by switchable consumers


• Own production of natural gas in liquified gas facilities
• Switching boilers to other fuels
• Switching combined heat and power units to other fuels
• Using natural gas from gas storages

The last option is important because it may only be small amounts which are available but these are needed
during peak demands. Independent of the amount of the stored natural gas, a strategy must be defined how
these storages are filled again over short or long periods of time. This requires communication between EMS and
a forecast/scheduling tool, which provides schedules for charging/discharging storages (e.g. SIEMENS Prophet
Solution).

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 87
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

Display of the trend calculation


The result of the trend calculation is constantly displayed in a control center, indicating required manual switching
actions.

By default, there is a picture in the system that displays the current measuring period and the last five minutes of
the previous measuring period. The current point in time is shown by a line wandering through the processing
cycle. An arrow at the end of the period shows the expected average power value. The following parameters are
shown in the curves:

• Allowed supply limit


• Currently measured power values
• Expected power trend over the rest of the period ((actual value) trend)
• Expected supply trend considering scheduled switching actions ((real value) trend)

The forecast channel showing the forecasted maximum deviation for every calculated value further increases the
meaningfulness of the forecast representation.

Current period
Previouse period
Current value
Limit

Real value

process of time
Current
power
consumption

Time

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 88
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.14. Production and Facility Scheduler

The Production and Facility Scheduler is a comprehensive tool for managing time-controlled events directly from
within SICAM 230.

Two execution modes are supported: Absolute times and relative times. The relative times are influenced by
equipment models such as shift start, break times and freely definable events. All times can be displayed in a
calendar module with preview options, which allow you to check future switching points.

• Managing time-controlled tasks with variables and functions


• Daily, weekly and monthly schedules
• Integration of national holidays
• Simple online operation
• Definition of priorities
• Linking VBA macros
• Logging in the CEL
• Relative time execution
• System and user events
• Calendar view
• Switching point preview
• Fully network capable

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 89
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
SICAM 230 04.12.2012
Functional description

13.15. SICAM 230 SQL Online

Unidirectional communication with any SQL database (not included in delivery). The Process Gateway holds up
the current process image for any variables.

This way, there is always a current image of real-time data in the database.

13.16. Straton

Straton is an IEC 61131-3 programming environment for different target systems with a Straton runtime kernel. In
the case of SICAM 230, the Straton runtime kernel is designed as a soft PLC. With the Straton development
environment - the so called Workbench - PLCs can be engineered and programmed in the five defined languages
of the IEC 61131-3.

s Aktiengesellschaft Page 90
© 2012 by SIEMENS AG Energy Division • All Rights Reserved
Display System
w w w.ieiworld.com

UPC-V312-D525 12.1’’ Aluminum Rugged Panel PC

Features
● Fully IP 65 compliant with fanless Intel® Atom™ D525 1.8GHz dual-core processor
● 12.1’’ 600 nits 1024 x 768 LCD with LED backlight
● TWIN-DC input, 9V ~ 36V and 10.5V ~ 36V, switch automatically
● Dual-band 2.4/5GHz Wi-Fi 802.11 a/b/g/n 3T3R MIMO design
● Reserved space for 3.75G / HSUPA USB module
● Optional GPS receiver
● Optional EM or Mifare RFID reader
● Optional Bluetooth module
● Built-in 2-mgeapixel webcam with AF, AE and AWB capabilities
● CAN-bus interface with isolation
● Robust die-casting aluminum chassis

Wireless Redundant
Speakers Microphone Camera Touchscreen Fanless Full IP65 -20ºC~60ºC
Specifications 802.11a/b/g/n Dual DC

Model Name UPC-V312-D525-R12


LCD Size 12.1”
Max Resolution 1024(W) x 768(H)
Brightness (cd/m²) 600
Contrast Ratio 700:1
Display
LCD Color 16.2M
Pixel Pitch (mm) (HxV) 0.24(H) x 0.24(V)
Viewing Angle (V/H) 150° / 130°
Backlight MTBF (hrs) 50000
Touch Screen Resistive Type 5-Wire with RS-232 interface
Touch
Touch Controller DMC 9000
SBC UPCMB-V312-D525-R10
CPU Intel® Atom™ D525 1.8GHz dual-core processor
Chipset Intel® ICH8M
Motherboard
RAM On-board 2GB DDR3 SO-DIMM (System Max. 2GB )
Ethernet Realtek RTL8111CP PCIe GbE controller
Audio Codec Realtek ALC888 audio codec
RS-422/485 (4-pin box header)
RS-232 (DB-9 connector)
CAN-bus (3-pin terminal block)
GbE LAN (RJ-45 connector)
4 x USB connector
I/O Ports and Switches
Audio jack (Line-out, Mic)
VGA port (DB-15 connector
DC-IN 1 (terminal block) / DC-IN 2 (DC jack)
Reset button
AT/ATX switch
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n 3T3R module (WIFI-RT5393-DB-R10)
Wireless
Telec certified
Connectivity
Bluetooth Bluetooth V2.0+EDR with USB interface (optional)
3G Reserved USB connector (Optional)
Driver Bay SSD CF Type II / mSATA (SATA2 Signal)
Front Panel Contruction Aluminum Die-Casting
Chassis Construction Extruded Aluminum Alloy
Mounting VESA 100mm x 100mm and 75mm x 75mm with M8 screws
Physical Front Panel Color Orange (Pantone 151C)
Dimensions (WxHxD) (mm) 338.5 x 276.25 x 62.86
Cut Out Dimensions (WxH) (mm) 338.5 x 276.25
Net / Gross Weight 4.5 kg/ 6.8 kg
PCIe Mini slot for Wi-Fi
Expansion Slot
PCIe Mini slot
System Cooling Fanless
Operating Temperature -20°C~60°C
Storage Temperature -40°C~85°C
Vibration MIL-STD-810F 514.5C-2 (with CF card or SSD)
Environment
Shock Half-sine wave shock 3G; 11ms; 3 shocks per axis
IP Level Full IP 65
Safety & EMC CE / FCC
65W power adapter (Meet PSE)
Adapter (Power adapter supports operating temperature 0°C ~ 40°C)
Input: 90VAC~264VAC, 50/60Hz; Output: 19V DC
Power
Power 1: 9 (+/-0.3)~36V
Requirement
Power 2: 10.5 (+/-0.3)~36V
Consumption 52W
UPC-V312-2014-V11
Display System
w w w.ieiworld.com

Ordering Information
Part No. Description

12.1” 600cd/m² XGA fanless full IP 65 panel PC with Intel® Atom™ D525 dual core 1.8GHz,802.11a/b/g/n wireless module, resistive touch screen,
UPC-V312-D525/R/2G-R12
2-megapixel camera, microphone, 2GB DDR3 RAM, R12

Options Packing List


Item P/N Q'ty
Item P/N
Utility CD 7B000-000741-RS 1
ARM ARM-11-RS/ARM-31-RS
One Key Recovery CD 1

Wall Mounting Kit AFLWK-19B/ AFLWK-12 IR Remote Controller 7Z000-SLPCB005-RS 1


RJ-45 to DB-9 COM Port Cable 32005-000200-200-RS 1
Stand STAND-A19-RS/STAND-A21-R10/STAND-210-R11
M8 Screw 44325-080081-RS 8
GPS Module Kit UPC-GPS-KIT01-R10 M4 Screw 44005-040082-RS 8

EM RFID Kit UPC-EM-RFID-KIT01-R10 Mounting Bracket 41003-0382C2-00-RS 2


Screw Driver 45019-001004-00 1
MiFARE RFID Kit UPC-MF-RFID-KIT01-R11
Power Adapter 63040-010065-010-RS 1
OS: Win CE 6.0 (128MB CF Card) UPCCF-V312-D525-CE060-128M-R10 Power Cord (European Standard) 32702-000401-100-RS 1
RS-422 Cable 32205-002400-100-RS 1
OS: Win XPE (4GB CF Card) UPCCF-V312-D525-XPE-4G-R10
Power Transfer Cord 32702-000300-100-RS 1
OS: Win 7 Embedded (4GB CF Card) UPCCF-V312-D525-WES7E-4G-R10 M8 to M4 Screw 44300-040061-RS 8

Power2 (DC jack)


Power1 (Terminal block)
I/O Interface
Fuse VGA
LAN

MIC, Line-out
USB
COM2 (RS-485)
COM1 (RS-232)
CAN-bus

UPC-V312 Dimensions (Unit: mm)

UPC-V312-2014-V12
Ro

eRSTP RoS
RuggedSwitch® RS900
eRSTP
TM TM

A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption
Rugged Operati

eRSTP ZPL eRSTP


System™

ZPL
TM TM

Rugged Opera
Zero-Packet-Loss™ Rugged Operating

ZPL eRSTP
Zero-Packet-Loss™ System™
System™

ZPL
TM

Features and Benefits


Rugged Opera
Rugged Operating System™
Ethernet Ports

eRSTP
Zero-Packet-Loss™ Zero-Packet-Loss™ System™

„„
Up to 9 Ports: 6 Base 10/100BaseTX TM
ports with option for 3
additional Fiber or Copper ports
„„Industry standard fiber optical connectors: Rugged Operating
System™
„„ LC, SC, ST, MTRJ
„„ Multimode and Singlemode optical transceivers
„„ Long haul optics allow distances up to 90km

Cyber Security Features


„„
Multi-level user passwords
„„SSH/SSL (128-bit encryption)
„„ Enable/disable ports, MAC based port security
„„ Port based network access control (802.1x)
„„ VLAN (802.1Q) to segregate and secure network traffic
„„ R ADIUS centralized password management
„„ SNMPv3 authentication and 56-bit encryption

RuggedRatedTM for Reliability in Harsh Environments


„„
Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges
The RuggedSwitch® RS900 is a 9-port industrially hardened,
zzMeets IEEE 1613 class 1 (electric utility substations)
fully managed, Ethernet switch specifically designed to operate
zz Exceeds IEC 61850-3 (electric utility substations)
reliably in electrically harsh and climatically demanding
zz Exceeds IEC 61800-3 (variable speed drive systems)
environments.
zz Exceeds IEC 61000-6-2 (generic industrial)
The RS900 provides a high level of immunity to electromagnetic zz Exceeds NEMA TS-2 (traffic control equipment)
interference and heavy electrical surges typical of environments „„Hazardous Location Certification: Class 1 Division 2
„„ - 40°C to +85°C operating temperature (no fans)
found on plant floors or in curb side traffic control cabinets. An
„„ Conformal coated printed circuit boards (optional)
operating temperature range of -40 to +85°C (-40 to +185°F)
coupled with hazardous location certification (Class 1 Division 2) Rugged Operating System (ROS®) Features
allows the RS900 to be placed in almost any location. „„
Simple plug and play operation - automatic learning,
negotiation, and crossover detection
The RS900 is packaged in a compact, galvanized steel enclosure „„MSTP 802.1Q-2005 (formerly 802.1s)
that allows either DIN or panel mounting for efficient use of „„ RSTP (802.1w) and Enhanced Rapid Spanning Tree
cabinet space. The RS900 provides an integrated power supply (eRSTP™) network fault recovery (<5ms)
with a wide range of voltages (88-300VDC or 85-264VAC) for „„ Quality of Service (802.1p) for real-time traffic
worldwide operability or dual-redundant, reversible polarity, „„ VLAN (802.1Q) with double tagging and GVRP support
24VDC and 48VDC power supply inputs for high availability „„ Link aggregation (802.3ad)
applications requiring dual or backup power inputs. „„ IGMP Snooping for multicast filtering
„„ Port configuration, status, statistics, mirroring, security
The RS900’s superior ruggedized design coupled with the „„ Industrial automation features (eg. Modbus)
embedded Rugged Operating System (ROS®) provides improved
system reliability and advanced networking features making it Management Tools
ideally suited for creating Ethernet networks for mission-critical, „„
Web-based, Telnet, CLI management interfaces
real-time, control applications. „„SNMP v1/v2/v3 (56-bit encryption)
„„ Remote Monitoring (RMON)
The versatility and wide selection of fiber optics allows the „„ Rich set of diagnostics with logging and alarms
RS900 to be used in a variety of applications. The RS900
Universal Power Supply Options
provides up to three 100Mbps fiber optical Ethernet ports for „„
Fully integrated power supply
creating a fiber optical backbone with high noise immunity and „„Universal high-voltage range: 88-300VDC or 85-264VAC
long haul connectivity. „„ Dual low-voltage DC inputs: 24VDC (10-36VDC) or
48VDC (36-72VDC)
All RuggedCom products are backed by a five year warranty and
„„ Terminal blocks for reliable maintenance free connections
unsurpassed technical support. „„ CSA/UL 60950 safety approved to +85°C RUGGEDCOM
ISO 9001
REGISTERED

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 1


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

RuggedSwitch® RS900

Optional Ports:
XXUp to 3 Ports
XXFast 10/100BaseTx
XXFiber Optical (MMF/SMF)
XXSC, ST, LC and MTRJ
XXBi-directional (single strand)
XXDistances up to 90km

Rugged Construction:
Operating Temperature
XX20 AWG. galvanized
XX- 40°C to +85°C
steel enclosure
XXNo Fans
XXConformal coating
(optional)

Hazardous Location Fast Ethernet Ports:


Certification XX6 - Fast Ethernet Ports
XXClass 1, Division 2 (10/100BaseTX)

Integrated Power Supply Mounting Options Critical Alarm Relay


XXUniversal high-voltage range: XXDIN Rail XXForm-C failsafe contact relay:
88-300VDC or 85 - 264VAC XXPanel Mount 1A@30VDC
XXPopular low voltage DC ranges:
24VDC (10-36VDC)
48VDC (36-59VDC)
XXDual Isolated DC power inputs

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 2


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

ROS® Features
Cyber Security network traffic due to the internal queues that buffer frames
Cyber security is an urgent issue in many industries where and then transmit on a first come first serve basis. ROS®
advanced automation and communications networks play a supports ‘Class of Service’ in accordance with IEEE 802.1p
crucial role in mission critical applications and where high that allows time critical traffic to jump ahead to the front of the
reliability is of paramount importance. Key ROS® features that queue thus minimizing latency and reducing jitter to allow such
address security issues at the local area network level include: demanding applications to operate correctly. ROS® allows priority
classification by port, tags, MAC address, and IP type of service
„„
Passwords - Multi-level user passwords secures switch (ToS). A configurable “weighted fair queuing” algorithm
against unauthorized configuration controls how frames are emptied from the queues.
„„SSH / SSL - Extends capability of password protection
to add 128-bit encryption of passwords and data as they cross
VLAN (IEEE 802.1Q)
the network
Virtual local area networks (VLAN) allow the segregation of a
„„ Enable / Disable Ports - Capability to disable ports so that
physical network into separate logical networks with independent
traffic can not pass
broadcast domains. A measure of security is provided since hosts
„„ 802.1Q VLAN - Provides the ability to logically segregate
can only access other hosts on the same VLAN and traffic storms
traffic between predefined ports on switches
are isolated. ROS® supports 802.1Q tagged Ethernet frames and
„„ MAC Based Port Security - The ability to secure ports on
VLAN trunks. Port based classification allows legacy devices to be
a switch so only specific Devices / MAC addresses can
assigned to the correct VLAN. GVRP support is also provided to
communicate via that port
simplify the configuration of the switches on the VLAN.
„„ 802.1x Port Based Network Access Control - The ability to
lock down ports on a switch so that only authorized clients can
communicate via this port Link Aggregation (802.3ad)
„„ R ADIUS - authentication service using MD5 hash and The link aggregation feature provides the ability to aggregate
providing centralized password management several Ethernet ports into one logical link (port trunk) with
„„ SNMPv3 - encrypted authentication access security and data higher bandwidth. This provides an inexpensive way to set up
encryption (CBC-DES with 56-bit encryption key) a high speed backbone to improve network bandwidth. This
„„ Secure Socket Layer - Web-based management using SSL feature is also known as “port trunking”, “port bundling”, “port
with data encryption (128-bit encryption key) teaming”, and “Ethernet trunk”.
„„ RSA – 1024 bit key for key management and key exchange
„„ TACACS+ - Terminal Access Control and Accounting Services IGMP Snooping
Client provides encrypted authentication and authorization ROS® uses IGMP snooping (Internet Group Management
„„ Point to Point (PPP) - using CHAP (MD5 Hash) Protocol v1&v2) to intelligently forward or filter multicast traffic
authentication service streams (e.g. MPEG video) to or from hosts on the network. This
„„ SFTP - Secure File Transfer Protocol using SSH encryption reduces the load on network trunks and prevents packets from
being received on hosts that are not involved. ROS® has a very
The ROS® cyber security features are included to help address the powerful implementation of IGMP snooping that:
various industry specific security standards such as NERC CIP, ISA
S99, AGA 12, IEC 62443, ISO 17799:2005 and PCSRF SPP-ICS. „„
Can be enabled on a per VLAN basis.
„„Detects and filters all multicast streams regardless of whether
subscribers exist.
Enhanced Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (eRSTP™)
„„ Supports “router-less” operation by supporting an “active” mode.
RuggedCom eRSTP™ allows the creation of fault-tolerant ring
„„ Restores traffic streams immediately after an RSTP
and mesh Ethernet networks that incorporate redundant links
topology change.
that are ‘pruned’ to prevent loops. eRSTP™ yields worst-case
fault recovery1 of 5ms times the ‘bridge diameter’ and allows SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
rings of up to 160 switches. For example, a ring of ten switches SNMP provides a standardized method for network management
will have fault recovery times under 50ms. eRSTP™ implements stations the ability to interrogate devices from different
both STP and RSTP to ensure interoperability with commercial vendors. SNMP versions supported by ROS® are v1, v2c, and
switches unlike other proprietary ‘ring’ solutions. v3. SNMPv3 in particular provides security features such as
authentication, privacy with data encryption (CBC-DES with
Quality of Service (IEEE 802.1p) 56-bit encryption key) and access control not present in earlier
Some networking applications such as real-time control or VoIP SNMP versions. ROS® also supports numerous standard MIBs
(voice over IP) require predictable arrival times for Ethernet (Management Information Base) allowing for easy integration
frames. Switches can introduce latency in times of heavy with any network management system (NMS).

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 3


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

ROS® Features
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) (cont’d) Port Configuration and Status
A feature of SNMP supported by ROS® is the ability to generate ROS® allows individual ports to be ‘hard’ configured for speed,
“traps” upon system events. RuggedNMS™, the RuggedCom duplex, auto-negotiation, flow control and more. This allows
management solution, can record traps from multiple devices proper connection with devices that do not negotiate or have
providing a powerful network troubleshooting tool. It also unusual settings. Detailed status of ports with alarm and SNMP
provides a graphical visualization of the network and is fully trap on link problems aid greatly in system troubleshooting.
integrated with all RuggedCom products.
Port Statistics and RMON (Remote Monitoring)
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) ROS® provides continuously updating statistics per port that
SNTP automatically synchronizes the internal clock of all ROS ®
provide both ingress and egress packet and byte counters as
devices on the network. This allows for correlation of time well as detailed error figures. Also provided is full support for
stamped events for troubleshooting. the RMON statistics, history, alarms, and event groups. RMON
allows for very sophisticated data collection, analysis and
SCADA and Industrial Automation detection of traffic patterns.
ROS® contains features that optimize network performance and
simplify switch management based on the unique requirements Event Logging and Alarms
found in SCADA and industrial automation applications. Features ROS® records all significant events to a non-volatile system log
such as Modbus TCP management for retrieval of switch data using allowing forensic troubleshooting. Events include link failure and
the ubiquitous Modbus protocol and DHCP Option 82, a Rockwell recovery, unauthorized access, broadcast storm detection, and
Automation ODVA requirement for IP address assignment based self-test diagnostics among others. Alarms provide a snapshot of
on the location of the end device, provide capabilities not found in recent events that have yet to be acknowledged by the network
typical “commercial” or “office grade” Ethernet switches. administrator. An external hardware relay is de-energized during
the presence of critical alarms allowing an external controller to
Port Based Network Access Control (802.1x) react if desired.
ROS® supports the IEEE 802.1x standard that defines a
mechanism for port-based network access control which HTML Web Browser and Telnet User Interfaces
provides a means of authenticating and authorizing devices ROS® provides a simple, intuitive user interface for configuration
attached to LAN ports. and monitoring via a standard graphical web browser or via
Telnet. All system parameters include detailed on-line help to
Port Rate Limiting make setup a breeze. ROS®, presents a common look and feel
ROS® supports configurable rate limiting per port to limit unicast and standardized configuration process allowing easy migration
and multicast traffic. This can be essential to managing precious to other RuggedCom managed products.
network bandwidth for service providers. It also provides edge
security for denial of service (DoS) attacks. Configuration via ASCII Text File
All configuration parameters are stored in an ASCII formatted
Broadcast Storm Filtering text file that can easily be transferred via TFTP or Xmodem.
Broadcast storms wreak havoc on a network and can cause The configuration file can be saved for backup purposes and
attached devices to malfunction. This could be disastrous on easily manipulated by a text editor. The same text file can be
a network with mission critical equipment. ROS® limits this by downloaded to the switch at a later date in order to re-configure
filtering broadcast frames with a user-defined threshold. or restore a previous configuration.

Loss of Link Management Command Line Interface (CLI)


Some intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) have dual fiber optic ports A command line interface can be used in conjunction with
with automatic failover to a backup port should the primary fail. ROS® remote shell to automate data retrieval, configuration updates,
ensures this mechanism works reliably under all failure modes by and firmware upgrades. A powerful SQL-like capability allows
appropriately disabling link signals when required. ROS® also flushes expert users the ability to selectively retrieve or manipulate any
learned MAC addresses to ensure the failover occurs quickly. parameters the device has to offer.
1 eRSTP fault recovery times may be approximated as follows:
For 100 Mbps, fault recovery performance is <5ms/hop
Port Mirroring For 1,000 Mbps, fault recovery performance is <5ms/hop + 20ms

ROS® can be configured to duplicate all traffic on one port to a


designated mirror port. When combined with a network analyzer,
this can be a powerful troubleshooting tool.

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 4


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

EMI and Environmental Type Tests


IEC 61850-3 EMI TYPE TESTS
TEST Description Test Levels Severity Levels
Enclosure Contact +/- 8kV 4
IEC 61000-4-2 ESD
Enclosure Air +/- 15kV 4
IEC 61000-4-3 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 20 V/m Note 1
Signal ports +/- 4kV @ 2.5kHz Note 1

D.C. Power ports +/- 4kV 4


IEC 61000-4-4 Burst (Fast Transient)
A.C. Power ports +/- 4kV 4

Earth ground ports +/- 4kV 4


Signal ports +/- 4kV line-to-earth, +/- 2kV line-to-line 4
IEC 61000-4-5 Surge D.C. Power ports +/- 2kV line-to-earth, +/- 1kV line-to-line 3
A.C. Power ports +/- 4kV line-to-earth, +/- 2kV line-to-line 4
Signal ports 10V 3
D.C Power ports 10V 3
IEC 61000-4-6 Induced (Conducted) RFI
A.C. Power ports 10V 3
Earth ground ports 10V 3
40 A/m continuous, 1000 A/m for 1 s Note 1
IEC 61000-4-8 8 Magnetic Field Enclosure ports 1000 A/m for 1 s 5
D.C. Power ports 30% for 0.1s, 60% for 0.1s, 100% for 0.05s N/A
IEC 61000-4-29
Voltage Dips & Interrupts 30% for 1 period, 60% for 50 periods N/A
A.C. Power ports
IEC 61000-4-11 100% for 5 periods, 100% for 50 periods N/A
Signal ports 2.5kV common, 1kV diff. mode@1MHz 3
IEC 61000-4-12 Damped Oscillatory D.C. Power ports 2.5kV common, 1kV diff. mode@1MHz 3
A.C. Power ports 2.5kV common, 1kV diff. mode@1MHz 3
Signal ports 30V Continuous, 300V for 1s 4
IEC 61000-4-16 Mains Frequency Voltage
D.C. Power ports 30V Continuous, 300V for 1s 4
IEC 61000-4-17 Ripple on D.C. Power Supply D.C. Power ports 10% 3
Signal ports 2kVac (Fail-Safe Relay output) N/A
IEC 60255-5 Dielectric Strength D.C. Power ports 1.5kV DC N/A
A.C. Power ports 2kVac N/A
Signal ports 5kV (Fail-Safe Relay output) N/A
IEC 60255-5 H.V. Impulse D.C. Power ports 5kV N/A
A.C. Power ports 5kV N/A

IEEE 1613 (C37.90.x) EMI IMMUNITY TYPE TESTS 2


Test Description Test Levels
Enclosure Contact +/-2kV, +/-4kV, +/- 8kV
IEEE C37.90.3 ESD
Enclosure Air +/-4kV, +/-8kV, +/-15kV
IEEE C37.90.2 Radiated RFI Enclosure ports 35 V/m
Signal ports +/- 4kV @ 2.5kHz
D.C. Power ports +/- 4kV
IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Transient
A.C. Power ports +/- 4kV
Earth ground ports3 +/- 4kV
Signal ports 2.5kV common mode @1MHz
IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory D.C. Power ports 2.5kV common, 1kV diff. mode@1MHz
A.C. Power ports 2.5kV common, 1kV diff. mode@1MHz
Signal ports 5kV (Fail-Safe Relay output)
IEEE C37.90 H.V. Impulse D.C. Power ports 5kV
A.C. Power ports 5kV
Signal ports 2kVac
IEEE C37.90 Dielectric Strength D.C. Power ports 1.5kV DC
A.C. Power ports 2kVac

Environmental Type Tests


Test Description Test Levels
IEC 60068-2-1 Cold Temperature Test Ad -40°C, 16 Hours
IEC 60068-2-2 Dry Heat Test Bd +85°C, 16 Hours

IEC 60068-2-30 Humidity (Damp Heat, Cyclic) Test Db 95% (non-condensing), 55°C , 6 cycles

IEC 60255-21-1 Vibration 2g @ (10 - 150) Hz


IEC 60255-21-2 Shock 30g @ 11mS
Notes: 1. Ruggedcom specified severity levels
2. Meets Class 2 requirements for an all fiber configuration. Class 1 for copper ports.

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 5


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

EMI and Environmental Type Tests


NEMA TS-2 Requirements
Test Description Levels Performance Criteria*
Temperature: Low Temperature/Low
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.2.7.3 89.0 VAC @ -34°C
Voltage
Temperature: Low Temperature/High
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.2.7.4 135.0VAC @ -34°C EUT Continued to function properly
Voltage
during and following all temperature
Temperature: High Temperature/High
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.2.7.5 135.0VAC @ + 75°C and humidity testing
Voltage
Temperature: High Temperature/Low
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.2.7.6 89.0VAC @ + 75°C
Voltage
EUT functioned properly following test
TS-2 1998, Section 2 para. 2.2.8.4 Vibration Endurance Test 0.5g @ 30Hz for 1hr on all three planes
procedure. No physical damage.
+/-10g half sine wave for 11msec on all EUT functioned properly following test
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.1.10 Mechanical Shock
three planes procedure. No physical damage.
One +/-300VDC pulse every other cycle
Electrical Transients: High Repetition Noise EUT functioned properly during and
TS-2 1992, Section 2, para. 2.1.6.1 once every 3 seconds across 360 ° of line
(AC Terminals) following test procedure. No damage
cycle (2500W peak)
One +/-600VDC pulse every second, ran-
Electrical Transients: Low-Repetition High EUT functioned properly during and
TS-2 1998, Section 2 para. 2.1.6.2 domly distributed across 360 ° of line cycle.
Energy (AC Terminals following test procedure. No damage
Ten pulses total.
One +/-300VDC pulse every second, mini- EUT functioned properly during and
TS-2 1998, Section 2, para 2.1.7 Electrical Transients: I/O Terminals
mum 5 pulses per port following test procedure. No damage
Electrical Transients: Nondestruct Transient One +/-1000VDC pulse every two seconds, EUT functioned properly following test
TS-2 1992, Section 2, para. 2.1.8
Immunity (AC Terminals) 3 per each polarity. procedure. No damage

Notes: 1. Class 2 refers to “Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high security margin is required or where the vibration levels are very high, ( e.g. shipboard application and for severe transportation conditions”)

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 6


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

Technical Specifications
Power Supply Network Management
„„
Power Consumption: 10W Max „„
HTTP graphical web-based, SSL (128-bit encryption)
„„24VDC: 10-36 VDC, 0.4A „„SNMP v1, v2c, v3 (56-bit encryption)
„„ 48VDC: 36-72 VDC, 0.2A „„ Telnet, VT100, SSH/SFTP (128-bit encryption)
„„ HI Voltage AC/DC: 88-300VDC, 85-264VAC, 0.1A „„ Command Line Interface (CLI)
„„ RSA Key Management (1024 bit key)
Critical Alarm Relay „„ Authentication and Accounting - TACACS+ (encrypted),
„„
Form-C failsafe contact relay: 1A@30VDC
RADIUS client, PPP
Physical
IEEE Compliance
„„
Height:18.8cm / 7.4” „„
802.3-10BaseT
„„Width: 6.6cm / 2.6” „„802.3u-100BaseTX, 100BaseFX
„„ Depth: 12.7cm / 5.0” „„ 802.3x-Flow Control
„„ Weight: 1.22kg / 2.7lbs „„ 802.3ad-Link Aggregation
„„ Ingress Protection: IP40 (1mm objects) „„ 802.1D-MAC Bridges
„„ Enclosure: 20 AWG galvanized steel enclosure „„ 802.1D-Spanning Tree Protocol
„„ Mounting: DIN rail or panel mounted „„ 802.1p-Class of Service
Switch Properties „„ 802.1Q-VLAN Tagging
„„
Switching method: Store & Forward „„ 802.1w-Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
„„
Switching latency: 8 us (100Mbps) „„ 802.1x-Port Based Network Access Control
„„
Switching bandwidth: 1.8Gbps „„ 802.1Q-2005 (formerly 802.1s) MSTP
„„MAC addresses: 8192
IETF RFC Compliance
„„ Priority Queues: 4 „„
RFC768-UDP
„„ Frame buffer memory: 1 Mbit „„RFC783-TFTP
„„ Simultaneous VLANs: 255 „„ RFC791-IP
„„ VLAN ID Range: 1 to 4094 „„ RFC792-ICMP
„„ IGMP multicast groups: 256 „„ RFC793-TCP
„„ Port rate limiting: 128kbps, 256, 512, 4, 8Mbps „„ RFC826-ARP
„„ No head of line blocking „„ RFC854-Telnet
Approvals „„ RFC894-IP over Ethernet
„„
Hazardous Locations: Class 1, Division 2 „„ RFC1112-IGMP v1
„„ISO: Designed and manufactured using a ISO9001: 2000 „„ RFC1519-CIDR
certified quality program „„ RFC1541-DHCP (client)
„„ CE Marking „„ RFC2030-SNTP
„„ Emissions: FCC Part 15 (Class A), „„ RFC2068-HTTP
EN55022 (CISPR22 Class A) „„ RFC2236-IGMP v2
„„ Safety: cCSAus (Compliant with CSA C22.2 No. 60950, „„ RFC2284-EAP
UL 60950, EN60950) „„ RFC2475-Differentiated Services
„„ Laser Eye Safety (FDA/CDRH): Complies with 21 „„ RFC2865-RADIUS
CFR Chapter1, Subchapter J. „„ RFC3414-SNMPv3-USM
„„ RFC3415-SNMPv3-VACM
EMI Immunity and Environmental Compliance
„„
IEC 61000-6-2 Industrial (Generic) IETF SNMP MIBS
„„IEC 61800-3 Industrial (Variable Speed Drive Systems) „„
RFC1493-BRIDGE-MIB
„„IEC 61850-3 Electric Utility Substations „„RFC1907-SNMPv2-MIB
„„IEEE 1613 Electric Utility Substations „„ RFC2012-TCP-MIB
„„NEMA TS 2 Traffic Control Equipment „„ RFC2013-UDP-MIB
„„ RFC2578-SNMPv2-SMI
Warranty „„ RFC2579-SNMPv2-TC
„„
5 Years - Applicable to design or manufacturing „„ RFC2819-RMON-MIB
related product defects. „„ RFC2863-IF-MIB
„„ draft-ietf-bridge-rstpmib-03-BRIDGE-MIB
„„ draft-ietf-bridge-bridgemib-smiv2-03-RSTP-MIB
„„ ANAifType-MIB

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 7


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

Fiber Specifications and Mechanical Drawing


Fiber Optical Specifications
Parameter Fiber Port Type
Mode Multimode Singlemode
Connectors MTRJ / ST / SC / LC LC / SC / ST
Typical Dist. (km) 2 20 50 90
Optical Wavelength (nm) 1300 1310
Cable SizeCore/Cladding (um) 50 or 62.5/125 8 or 9/125
Tx Power (dBm) -15.7 -15.5 -2.5 2.5
Rx Sensitivity (dBm) -33.5 -32 -37 -39
Typical Budget (dB) 17 16.5 34.5 41.5
Longer segment lengths dependent on fiber specifications. Consult factory for further details.
6.73

7.73

7.33
7.44

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 8


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

Order Codes
RS900  - ____ - ___- ___- ____ - ____ - _____
PS M P7 P8 P9 MOD

PS: Power Supply


„„
24 = 24 VDC (10-36 VDC)
„„48 = 48 VDC (36-72 VDC)
„„ HI = 85-264VAC or 88-300VDC

M: Mounting Option
„„
D = DIN Rail
„„P = Panel Mount
„„ N = None

P7, P8, P9: Port 7-9 Options*


„„
XX = No port
„„
T X = 10/100TX (if selected, port 7&8 must both be TX)
„„1x 100FX
„„MJ = 1 x 100FX - Multimode 1300nm, MTRJ connector
„„ MC = 1 x 100FX - Multimode 1300nm, SC connector
„„ MT = 1 x 100FX - Multimode 1300nm, ST connector
„„ ML = 1 x 100FX - Multimode 1300nm, LC connector
„„ T2 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, ST connector, Standard 20km
„„ L2 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, LC connector, Standard 20km
„„ L5 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, LC connector, Intermediate Reach 50km
„„ L9 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, LC connector, Long Reach 90km
„„ C2 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, SC connector, Standard 20km
„„ C5 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, SC connector, Intermediate Reach 50km
„„ C9 = 1 x 100FX - Singlemode 1310nm, SC connector, Long Reach 90km

MOD: Manufacturing Modifications


„„
XX = None
„„
C01 = Conformal Coating

*Note:If P7 and P8 are selected, they must have the same connector type.

Example Order Codes:

„„
RS900-24-D-TX-TX-00-XX
24VDC Power Supply, DIN Rail Mount, 2 10/100 TX Ports
„„RS900-48-P-TX-TX-MT-C01
48VDC Power Supply, Panel Mount, 2 10/100 TX Ports, 1 100FX ST MM, Conformal Coating
„„RS900-HI-D-C2-00-00-C01
HI Power Supply, DIN Rail Mount, 1 100FX SC SM 20km, Conformal Coating
„„ RS900-HI-D-L2-L2-00-XX
HI Power Supply, 2 100FX LC SM 20km
„„ RS900-HI-N-C5-C5-C9-C01
HI Power Supply, 2 100FX SC SM 50km, 1 100FX SC SM 90km, Conformal Coating

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 9


RuggedSwitch® RS900
A Siemens Business 9-Port Managed Ethernet Switch with Fiber Optical Uplinks, 128-bit Encryption

RuggedCom Inc.
300 Applewood Crescent, Unit 1,
Concord, Ontario, Canada  L4K 5C7

Tel:  +1 (905) 856-5288  Fax:  +1 (905) 856-1995


Toll Free:  1 (888) 264-0006

Technical Support Center


Toll Free (USA & Canada):  1 (866) 922-7975
International:  +1 (905) 856-5288
USA:  +1 (954) 922-7975
E-mail:  Support@RuggedCom.com
© 2010 RuggedCom Inc.
RuggedSwitch is a registered trademark of RuggedCom Inc.
Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation.
Patent Pending
All specifications in this document are subject to change without notice.
For additional information on our products and services, please
Rev 2u — 11/23/12 visit our web site at: www.RuggedCom.com

www.RuggedCom.com RuggedSwitch® RS900 10


Power Quality devices for all applications

SICAM P50 / P55
Power Meter

siemens.com/powerquality
Contents – SICAM P50 / P55

Page

1 Description 2/3

Function overview 2/4

Measured values and tolerances 2/7

Description of I / O modules 2/8

Configuration software 2/9

Benefits 2/11

2 Typical terminal assignments 2/12

Technical data 2/13

Dimension drawings 2/14

Selection and ordering data 2/15

The products and systems described in this catalog


are manufactured and sold according to a certified
management system (acc. to ISO 9001, ISO 14001
8 and BS OHSAS 18001).

2/2 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Description

Description
SICAM P is a power meter for panel mounting with graphic
display and background illumination, or for standard rail
mounting, used for acquiring and / or displaying measured
values in electrical power supply systems.
1
More than 100 values can be measured, including r.m.s.
values of voltages (phase-to-phase and / or phase-to-ground),
currents, active, reactive and apparent power and energy,

LSP_2823_SICAM_P50.tif
power factor, phase angle, harmonics of currents and voltages,
total harmonic distortion per phase plus frequency and
symmetry factor, energy output, as well as external signals
and states.

Main features of SICAM P:


ƒƒ Switch panel mounting with display of the device 2
SICAM P50: dimensions 96 mm x 96 mm / 3.78 in. x 3.78 in.
ƒƒ DIN rail mounting without display of the device
SICAM P55
Fig. 2/1  Power Meter – SICAM P50
ƒƒ Expandable with additional module for analog input or
analog output The input modules work with external signals with a mea-
ƒƒ 2 freely programmable binary outputs: e.g. energy
counters, limit violations or status signals
surement range of DC 0 – 20 mA. Mean values of all external
analog channels as well as states of digital channels can be 3
ƒƒ Trigger function for settable limits programmed for recorded and saved into the memory. All recorded quantities
sampled or r.m.s. values and binary state information can be “read out” and evaluated
ƒƒ Generating lists of minimum, average and maximum with the configuration software SICAM P Manager. Output
values for currents, voltages, power, energy, etc. modules can be used for conversion of any electrical quantity
ƒƒ Independent settings for currents, voltages, active and (current, voltage, etc.) into a DC 0 – 20 / 4 – 20 mA output
reactive power, power factor, etc.
ƒƒ Up to 6 alarm groups can be defined using AND / OR for
signal, generation of impulses for metering, indication of
limit value violations, as well as for switching operations. 4
logical combinations
ƒƒ Alarms can be used to increase counter values, to trigger Application example 1 (Fig. 2 / 2)
the oscilloscope function or to generate binary output SICAM P as a panel-mounted device for direct electrical
pulses. power monitoring. With a very simple configuration, the
display of measured values is adaptable to the specific
Input and output modules
SICAM P50 can be equipped with additional analog or digital
requirements of the user.
5
input or output modules. SICAM P50 / P55 comes with 1 slot
where the module may be installed. For different application
areas, 5 different modules are available.

Module assignment
The assignment of the different analog / digital modules can
only be done in the course of an order of a SICAM P. 6
A change or a retrofit of modules of an existing SICAM P is
not possible. Fig. 2/4 shows an example of extended I / O for
various applications.
LSP2809.tif

Applications
Power monitoring systems with SICAM P, a permanently
installed system, enables continuous logging of energy-relat- 7
ed data and provides information on operational characteris-
tics of electrical systems. SICAM P helps identify sources of
energy consumption and time of peak consumption.
This knowledge allows to allocate and reduce energy costs. Fig. 2/2  SICAM P55
The major application area is power monitoring and record-
ing at MV and LV level. The major information types are
measured values, alarms and status information. 8

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/3


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Function overview

Application example 2 (Fig. 2 / 3) Function overview


SICAM P as a panel-mounted or snap-on mounted device for ƒƒ Measurement of voltage, current, active & reactive power,
use on a process bus. Network linking is possible with the frequency, active & reactive energy, power factor, symme-
1 integrated RS485 port with the standard Profibus DP and
Modbus RTU / ASCII communication protocol. Furthermore, it
try factor, voltage and current harmonics up to the 21st,
total harmonic distortion
is also possible to integrate SICAM P50 into communication ƒƒ Single-phase, three-phase balanced or unbalanced
networks with IEC 60870-5-103 as standard protocol. That connection, four-wire connection
allows several SICAM P measured parameters to be indicated, ƒƒ Communications: Profibus DP, Modbus RTU / ASCII or
evaluated and processed at a central master station. The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
major application area is the integration into PLC systems as ƒƒ Simple parameterization via front key or RS485 communi-
a transducer. cation port using SICAM P Manager software
ƒƒ Graphic display with background illumination with up to
20 programmable screens

2 ƒƒ Real-time clock: Measured values and states will be


recorded with time stamps
ƒƒ 1 MB memory management: The allocation of the
non-volatile measurement memory is programmable.
ƒƒ Recording and display of limit value violations and log
entries
SICAM P SICAM P SICAM P

Other
SICAM P SICAM P ƒƒ Battery: Recordings like limit value violations or energy

3 field
devices
Device without
counter values stay safely in the memory up to 3 months
in case of a blackout.
PQ11-0052.EN.ai
display
Measuring functions
Measured input voltages and input currents are sampled for
Fig. 2/3  SICAM P with Profibus DP, Modbus and IEC 60870-5-103 calculation of the corresponding r.m.s. values. All parameters
derived from the measured values are calculated by a

4 Application example 3 (Fig. 2/4)


SICAM P can be ordered for snap-on mounting on a 35 mm / 
processor. They can be displayed on the screens and / or
transmitted via the serial interface. Measurement of voltage,
1.38 in. DIN rail. For carrying out the setting of the device, the current, active & reactive power, frequency, active & reactive
configuration software is necessary. energy, power factor, symmetry factor, voltage and current
harmonics up to the 21st, total harmonic distortion are
available. With the SICAM P it is also possible to define
several limit value groups with different limit values for the
Analog inputs

5 from transducers 0–20 mA


Water
Flow rate, pressure, PH, etc.
Analog outputs
Electr. quantities: U, I, cos φ, f,
etc. (DC: 0–20 / 4–20 mA)
measured parameters. These can be combined with logical
elements, such as AND, OR. Violations are counted and
indicated on the screen or made available at the binary
Digital outputs
Gas
Flow rate, pressure, etc. outputs. Triggering of the oscilloscope is possible as well.
Energy metering

Oil
Flow rate, pressure, etc. Messages, limit Quality
value violations
Development and production of the device is carried out in
Long- distance heating Relay contacts

6 Electr. quantities of other


breakouts
Switch at limit
value violations
accordance with ISO 9001, ensuring highest quality stan-
dard. That means high system reliability and product service
All measured values can
Communication
life. Further characteristics are the constant high accuracy
be shown in different
visual displays and also over years, CE designation, EMC strength, as well as the
stored in the measure-
ment buffer.
compliance with all relevant national and international
All measured signals can be
transmitted via Profibus DP or standards.
Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 to
a central master station.

7 Digital inputs
Messages, switch settings,
Technology
Powerful on-board microprocessors ensure fast registration
states and updating of measured parameters.
Recorded signals and information
can be read out and evaluated SICAM P can be connected to any power system configura-
Time synchronization using the configuration software
SICAM P Manager. tion directly (up to 690 V systems) or via transformer –
PQ11-0053.EN.ai
from single-phase to four-wire balanced or unbalanced
three-phase systems. SICAM P can be connected to any

8 Fig. 2/4  SICAM P: Application examples power system configuration up to 1 or 5 A or via current
transformer.
The power supply unit allows rated supply voltages from
24 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC.

2/4 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Function overview

Communication Memory management


As communication between field devices is becoming Due to the memory capacity (1 Mbyte) and the implemented
standard, the development of the SICAM P communication memory management, it is possible to freely configure the
interface is focused on the universality and flexibility of the
transmission protocol. It is connected via an RS485 port with
measurement memory for mean values, power recordings,
oscilloscope, limit value violations and binary states.
1
standard 9-pin D-Sub connector. After the assignment of the percentage, the corresponding
The SICAM P comes with the following standard communica- record time will be calculated and shown on the display auto-
tion protocols: matically.
ƒƒ Profibus DP V1 in compliance with EN 50170 Volume 2
and Modbus RTU / ASCII
ƒƒ Modbus RTU / ASCII and IEC 60870-5-103.

Limit values
Several limit value groups with up to 6 selectable parameters
can be set in SICAM P. The values can be combined with 2

PQ11-0028.EN.ai
logical elements such as AND / OR; limit value violations are
counted, they are available at binary outputs or used for
triggering the oscilloscope.
Memory “read-out”
Inputs / Outputs Recorded quantities and binary state information can be read
Figure 2 / 7 shows the I / O pin configuration of SICAM P.
Depending on the type of power system, the non required
out with the configuration software SICAM P Manager using
the RS485 interface. This requires a separate cable together 3
inputs remain unassigned. with an RS232 / RS485 converter. The configuration software
offers features for indication and evaluation of all saved
measured values and binary information.
For further information, please refer to the chapter “SICAM P
SICAM P 7KG775x configuration software package”.

Display and screens 4


All parameters can be displayed on the SICAM P screens as
required by the user. Up to 20 screens can be defined and
selected with the front keys. Switching from one screen to
another can be automatic or manual.
Clear designations as well as menu-driven configuration
guarantee simple and easy operation of the SICAM P screens.
Number, type, content and sequence of the screens are 5
PQ11-0031.EN.ai

configurable, e.g.:
ƒƒ 2, 3, 4 or 6 measured values in one screen
ƒƒ One list screen for minimum, average and maximum
values
Fig. 2/5  SICAM P: Inputs / outputs ƒƒ Screens for harmonics
ƒƒ Screen serving as phasor (vector) diagram.
6
Configuration Due to a wider graphical display, some display functions
Configuration of SICAM P is very easy. It can be done directly such as analog screen, oscilloscope, r.m.s. curve,
over the device display (if available) or over the SICAM P harmonic are available.
Manager parameterization software. Rapid configuration SICAM P is delivered with programmed default settings.
(even without consulting the manual) is possible due to A status line displayed in the measured value screens
indicates status, interfacing and diagnostic messages of
detailed index and operation via cursor and enter key.
Configuration and calibration settings are tamper-proof by SICAM P. The display is automatically refreshed every 1 s. 7
password protection.

8
PQ11-0044.EN.ai

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/5


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Function overview

List of screens examples

3-phase screen values Digital / Analog screen

1 V, I, cos φ 4 measured values –


digital

PQ11-0035.EN.ai
PQ11-0037.EN.ai

Digital values screen

2 Digital values screen


2 measured values –
digital
3 measured values –
digital / analog

PQ11-0033.EN.ai
3
PQ11-0036.EN.ai

2/6 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Measured values and tolerances

Measured values Measuring path 1 Output to Tolerances 2


Voltage L1-N, L2-N, L3-N, (N-E) ± 0.1 % 2 / ± 0.3 % 6

1
3)
Voltage L1-L2, L2-L3, L3-L1, Σ ± 0.1 % 2 / ± 0.3 % 6
Current L1, L2, L3, N, Σ 3) ± 0.1 % 2 / ± 0.3 % 6
Active power P + import, –export L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Reactive power Q + cap, –ind L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Apparent power S L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Power factor |cos φ| 4 L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
4
Active power factor |cos φ| L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Phase angle 4 L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 2 °
5
Frequency L1- N ± 10 mHz
Active energy demand L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 % 2
Active energy supply L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Active energy, total L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Active energy Σ, total Σ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy, inductive L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy, capacitive L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Reactive energy, total L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 % 3
Apparent energy L1, L2, L3, Σ ± 0.5 %
Unbalance voltage four-wire system ± 0.5 %
Unbalance current four-wire system ± 0.5 %
THD voltage L1, L2, L3 ± 0.5 %
THD current
Harmonic voltage V 3rd, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, 17th, 19th, 21st
L1, L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
± 0.5 %
± 0.5 %
4
Harmonic current I 3rd, 5th, 7th, 11th, 13th, 17th, 19th, 21st L1, L2, L3 ± 0.5 %
Limit value violations counter 1, 2, 3, 4
Analog inputs external
Binary inputs external

 Measured values can be displayed on measured-value


screens.
1
2
  Phases are displayed based on the type of connection.
  Tolerances at reference conditions are applicable from 0.5 to 1.2 times nominal value.
5
3
 Measured values transmitted via communication protocols   Average value of all phases.
4
Profibus DP + Modbus.   Measuring beginning with 2 % of the internal apparent power.
5
 Measured values selectable for list screens.   Measuring beginning with 30 % of the input voltage L1- N.
6
 Measured values transmitted via IEC 60870-5-103.  Limit values for the complete temperature range referring to: 0.1 to 1.2 times
nominal range.

Table 2/1  Measured values and tolerances


6

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/7


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Description of I / O modules

Description and applications Terminal Assignment


Analog input module
SICAM P can be equipped with a maximum of 1 analog input module. Each module comes
1 with 2 analog input channels, designed for a rated measurement range of 0 to 20 mA DC.
The modules themselves are galvanically isolated against the internal circuit. The two
channels of the module are not galvanically isolated against each other.
The analog input modules can be used for:
– Acquisition and display of measured signals with a measurement range of 0 to 20 mA DC
PQ11-0046.EN.ai
– Registration of limit value violations

Binary input module


SICAM P can be equipped with a maximum of 1 binary input module. Each module comes
with 2 galvanically isolated and rooted binary input channels. The input voltage will be
transformed into a constant current.
The binary input modules can be used for:
– Registration of binary states / messages
2 – Time synchronization of SICAM P
PQ11-0047.EN.ai

Analog output module


SICAM P can be equipped with a maximum of 1 analog output module. The module comes
with 2 channels, designed for a rated measurement range of 0 to 20 mA DC. The module
itself is galvanically isolated against the internal circuit. The two channels of the module
are not galvanically isolated against each other.
The analog output modules can be used for:

3 – Output of electrical quantities (current, voltage, power φ, |cos φ|, frequency, etc.)


between a rated measurement range of 0 to 20 mA DC or 4 to 20 mA DC
PQ11-0048.EN.ai

Binary output module


SICAM P can be equipped with a maximum of 1 binary output module. The module comes
with 2 rooted binary output channels, realized with 2 solid-state contacts.
The binary output modules can be used for:
– Generation of impulses for metering
– Indication of limit value violations
4 – Indication of the device status
– Indication of the rotation vector
PQ11-0049.DE.ai
frei

Relay output module


SICAM P can be equipped with a maximum of one relay output module. The relay output
module comes with 3 rooted electromechanical contacts. With these contacts, higher
power can be switched which is not possible when using the solid-state contacts. The relay
contacts can be configured in the same manner as the channels of the binary output

5
module.
The relay contacts can be used:
PQ11-0050.EN.ai
– As a switch at limit value violations, e.g. compensation of reactive power

Table 2/2  Description of I / O modules

2/8 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Configuration software

Configuration software

Application
The SICAM P configuration software package enables a
simple way to carry out the device settings. The package con-
SICAM P 1

PQ11-0051.ai
sists of the parameterizing software, a configuration cable
with RS232 / RS485 converter, as well as a plug-in power
supply for the converter. The SICAM P can be connected to
any standard PC via the RS232 / RS485 converter by means of
a 9-pin D-Sub connector.
The software runs with Windows 2000 and XP Professional
edition.
The configuration software permits a faster configuration
of the SICAM P devices. The user can set and store para-
meters even without having a unit by his side. The param- 2
eters are transferred to the SICAM P by using the “Send to
unit” command. Thus, a number of SICAM P units can be
configured with minimum effort. The stored set of param-
eters is simply reloaded when a unit has to be replaced.
Furthermore, firmware updates can be reloaded by means of
the SICAM P configuration software.
3

LSP2501de.tif
The configuration package supports all SICAM P units and is
absolutely essential for the devices SICAM P55.

Configuration of the measurement memory


Devices with measurement buffer offer the opportunity to
record measured quantities and state information. Therefore,
the configuration software enables menu items for the
determination of values and state information which should 4
be recorded.

LSP2502de.tif
Fig. 2/6  Configuration

Memory read-out (Fig. 2 / 9) 6


Separate functions integrated in the configuration software
enable a read-out of the following information:
ƒƒ Mean values
ƒƒ Mean values of power
ƒƒ Oscilloscope recordings
ƒƒ State information of binary channels
ƒƒ Limit value violations 7
ƒƒ Log entries.
LSP2503de.tif

8
Fig. 2/7  Configuration of the measurement memory

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/9


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Configuration software

Display and evaluation (Fig. 2/8 / Fig 2/9)


All values and information read out via the software are
shown automatically in tabular and graphical form together
1 with the time stamp on the screen.
The context menu offers some functions (masking of signals,
copy, zoom, measuring functions) for easy analysis of
measured values and state information.
The following measured values can be shown in graphical
form:
ƒƒ Mean values of voltage and current
ƒƒ Mean values of power
ƒƒ Oscilloscope recordings
ƒƒ State information of binary channels.

2 The following information is shown in tabular form:


ƒƒ Limit value violations

LSP2918en.tif
ƒƒ Log entries.

Export function Fig. 2/8  Oscilloscope view for evaluation


The software also enables a function for the export of

3 transmitted values and state information into an ASCII file.


This ASCII file can be used in other applications, e.g.
MS-Excel. Oscilloscope recordings can be exported into
COMTRADE formatted files.

LSP2492de.tif
5
Fig. 2/9  Display and evaluation

2/10 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Benefits

Benefits
A properly designed and installed monitoring system with
SICAM P has numerous benefits, including:
ƒƒ Environment
A better knowledge of how energy is used within a facility
1
allows to identify an array of prospects to improve
efficiency, minimize waste, and reduce energy consump-
tion, thereby allowing the facility to be a better steward of
its allotted natural resources.
ƒƒ Reliability
Assessment of data in the master station through Profibus DP,
Modbus RTU / ASCII or IEC 60870-5-103 protocols from the
SICAM Ps can reveal existing or imminent issues that can
affect the operation and product within a facility. Historical
data from power monitoring systems can help locate and 2
optimize the productivity.
ƒƒ Safety
Monitoring systems can limit the exposure of personnel
to potentially hazardous electrical environments by
providing remote status and operational parameters of
equipment within hazardous areas. Some monitoring
devices also offer a variety of additional parameters 3
(temperature, pressure, flow rate, vibration, status
indicators, etc.) through the use of I / O modules of the
SICAM P.
ƒƒ Financial
Each benefit discussed above either directly or indirectly
influences a business’ bottom line. In most cases, the
monetary impact from even one or two benefits can 4
quickly justify the purchase and installation of a power
monitoring system with SICAM P.

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/11


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Typical terminal assignments

Typical terminal assignments

1 Connection terminals SICAM P Connection terminals SICAM P

PQ11-0055.EN.ai
PQ11-0054.EN.ai
2 Fig. 2/10  Single-phase AC Fig. 2/11  4-wire 3-phase balanced

Connection terminals SICAM P Connection terminals SICAM P

3
PQ11-0056.EN.ai

PQ11-0057.EN.ai
Fig. 2/12  3-wire 3-phase balanced Fig. 2/13  3-wire 3-phase
4
Connection terminals SICAM P Connection terminals SICAM P
PQ11-0058.EN.ai

PQ11-0059.EN.ai
5

Fig. 2/14  4-wire 3-phase (low-voltage system) 1 2 Fig. 2/15  4-wire 3-phase (high-voltage system)

6
The above-mentioned terminal assignments are just some Remarks regarding low-voltage applications:
1
configuration examples. Within the range of the permissible  Up to VLN = 480 V, the SICAM P can be connected directly
maximum current and voltage values, a current or voltage without a transformer. In three- and four-phase systems,
transformer is not compulsory. except for three-phase systems without neutral: SICAM P
On the other hand, Y or V-connected voltage transformers can also be connected directly without a transformer up to
VLL = 690 V.
7 can be used.
All input or output terminals not required for measurement 2
 In IT low-voltage systems, SICAM P50 has to be connected
remain unassigned. via voltage transformer to avoid false alarm of isolator
monitoring.

2/12 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Technical data

Input for connection to AC systems only Unit design


Max. rated system voltage Y 400 / Δ 690 V Housing construction Housing for snap-on mounting
Control range 1.2 VEN / IEN 7KG7755 on a 35 mm / 1.38 in. rail according to

1
Rated frequency fEN 50 Hz; 60 Hz DIN EN 50022. SICAM P55: IP41
94 × 94 × 93.6 mm  /  3.7 x 3.7 x 3.69 in.
Input frequency range fE ± 5 Hz, min > 30 % VEN
(W × H × D)
Waveform sinusoidal or distorted up to
Housing construction Panel-mounting housing according
the 21st harmonic
7KG7750 to DIN 43700.
AC current input IE 3 current inputs SICAM P50: IP41 (front),
Rated input current IEN 1 A; 5 A IP65 (option) 96 × 96 × 76.5 mm   / 
Continuous overload 10 A 3.78 in. x 3.78 in. x 3.01 in. (W × H × D)
Surge withstand capability 100 A for 1 s Connector elements Degree of protection IP20 (terminals)
Power consumption 83 μVA at 1 A; 2.1 mVA at 5 A Auxiliary power Terminal for cable diameter
AC voltage input VE 3 voltage inputs 2.5 mm2  /  0.0039 sq in.
Rated voltage VEN 100 / 110 V; 190 V; 400 V; 690 V Voltage inputs Terminal for cable diameter
(phase-phase) 2.5 mm2  /  0.0039 sq in.
Continuous overload capacity
Surge withstand capability
1.5 VEN
2.0 × VEN
Current inputs Terminal for cable diameter
4.0 mm2  /  0.0062 sq in.
2
Input resistance 2.663 MΩ Binary outputs Terminal for cable diameter
2.5 mm2  /  0.0039 sq in.
Power consumption 120 mW (VLE = 400 V)
RS485 bus interface 9-pin D-Sub connector
Surge voltage category acc. to DIN EN 61010 Part 1
Weight
VEN to 400 V (phase-earth) III
7KG7750 / 7KG7755 SICAM P50 / P55: approx. 0.60 kg
VEN to 690 V (phase-phase) II
  with 1 I / O module approx. 0.65 kg
Auxiliary power
Rated range
multi-range power supply AC / DC
24 to 250 V DC or 100 to 230 V AC
Specification of analog / digital input and output modules
7KG775x
3
Total range ± 20 % of rated range
Analog input module
Power consumption
Rated input current 0 – 20 mA DC
7KG775 max. 4 W or 10 VA
Output range 0 – 24 mA DC
Binary outputs via isolated solid-state relay
Input impedance 50 Ω ± 0.1 %
Permissible voltage 150 V AC; 150 V DC
Power consumption 2 × 29 mW
Permissible current 100 mA continuous

Output resistance
300 mA for 100 s
50 Ω
at IN 0 – 24 mA
Accuracy 0.5 % of measuring range limit 4
Binary input module
Permissible switching frequency 10 Hz
Max. input voltage 150 V DC
Measurement functions
Max. current at high level 53 mA
Sampling rate 3.6 kHz
Current consumption 1.8 mA
Resolution 12 bit
at high level
Battery
Low level ≤ 10 V

5
7KG77 Varta CR2032, 3 V, Li-Mn or similar
High level ≤ 19 V
Real-time clock
Time lag between low-high, max. 3 ms
Deviation 150 ppm high-low
Communication interface Analog output module
Termination system 9-pin SUB D connector Rated output current 0 – 20 / 4 – 20 mA DC
Transmission rate 12 Mbit / sec max. with Profibus, Output range 0 – 24 mA DC
Modbus RTU / ASCII
Max. load impedance 250 Ω
Transmission protocols RS485 internal
Accuracy typ. 0.2 %; max. 0.5 % of nominal
parameterizable – Profibus DP and IEC 60870-5-103
Modbus RTU / ASCII Binary output module
Permissible voltage 150 V AC / 150 V DC
6
Ambient temperature acc. to IEC 60688
Operating temperature range 0 °C to + 55 °C Permissible current 100 mA
Storage / transportation – 25 °C to + 70 °C Permissible impulse current 300 mA for 100 ms
temperature range Output resistance 50 Ω
Climatic EN 60721-3-3 rare easy dewfall Triggering current 5 mA
Utilization category IR2 (environment) Triggering power 25 mW
Dielectric strength
Acc. to IEC 60688 5 kV 1.2 / 50 μs
Permissible switching
frequency
10 Hz
7
Relay module
Table 2/3  Technical data Permissible voltage 150 V AC / 120 V DC
Permissible current 5A
Min. current 1 mA at 5 V DC
Permissible power 5 A / 150 V AC or 5 A / 30 V DC
Output resistance 50 mΩ
Max. reaction time
Max. drop-out time
10 ms
7 ms
8

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/13


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Dimension drawings

Dimension drawings in mm / inch

PQ11-0061.EN.ai

Unlock
Wall with standard rails is

2 not in the scope of delivery

PQ11-0063.EN.ai

SICAM P55

3 SICAM P50

Fig. 2/16  SICAM P50 series Fig. 2/17  SICAM P55 series

2/14 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Products – SICAM P50 / P55
Selection and ordering data

Description Order No.

Power meter with display


SICAM P50 7KG7750-0   A0   -0AA  1
Built-in device for control panel 96 mm × 96 mm / 3.78 in. x 3.78 in.,
standard protocols: Profibus DP + Modbus 1

I / O module
without (standard) A
2 binary outputs B
2 binary inputs C
2 analog outputs (0 – 20 / 4 – 20 mA DC) D
2 analog inputs (0 – 20 mA DC) E
3 relay outputs G

Degree of protection for front 2


IP41 (standard) 1
IP65 3

Communication module 2
RS485 with Profibus DP and Modbus RTU / ASCII 0
RS485 with IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU / ASCII 1

3
Power meter without display
SICAM P55 7KG7755-0   A00 - 0AA 
Snap-on rail mounting device 96 mm × 96 mm (3.78 in. x 3.78 in.), degree of protection for front IP20,
standard protocols: Profibus + Modbus

4
I / O module
without (standard) A
2 binary outputs B
2 binary inputs C
2 analog outputs (0 – 20 / 4 – 20 mA DC) D
2 analog inputs (0 – 20 mA DC) E
3 relay outputs G

Communication module 2
RS485 with Profibus DP and Modbus RTU / ASCII
RS485 with IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU / ASCII
0
1
5

SICAM P configuration package 7KG7050-8A 


consisting of:
– Software SICAM P Manager (for configuration, calibration of SICAM P units by means of a personal
computer)
6
– Cable connector for connecting SICAM P to a PC (length 5 m / 16.40 ft incl. RS232 / RS485 converter)
– Connector PC-side: 9-pin SUB D connector, female
– SICAM P side: 9-pin SUB D connector, male
– Plug-in power supply unit for the converter

Power supply
AC 230 V / 50 Hz
AC 120 V / 60 Hz
A
B 7

1
 irmware V4 comprising Modbus and IEC 60870-5-103 protocols is available for download
F
on the Internet at www.sicam.com.
2
Devices ordered with Profibus DP and Modbus RTU / ASC II (V3) can be upgraded to
IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU / ASC II (V4) protocols.
Devices ordered IEC 60870-5-103 and Modbus RTU / ASC II (V4) cannot be upgraded to
Profibus DP and Modbus RTU / ASC II (V3) protocols option.
8
Table 2/4  Selection and ordering data

SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4 2/15


Products – SICAM P50 / P55

2/16 SICAM – Power Quality and Measurements · Siemens SR 10 · Edition 4


Published by and copyright © 2014:
SIEMENS AG
Energy Management
Energy Automation
Products
Humboldtstr.59
90459 Nuremberg, Germany
www.siemens.com/powerquality

All rights reserved.


If not stated otherwise on the individual pages of this
catalog, we reserve the right to include modifications,
especially regarding the stated values, dimensions and
weights.
Drawings are not binding.
All product designations used are trademarks or
product names of Siemens AG or other suppliers.
lf not stated otherwise, all dimensions in this catalog
are given in mm / inch.

Subject to change without prior notice.


The information in this document contains general
descriptions of the technical options available, which
may not apply in all cases. The required technical
options should therefore be specified in the contract.

For all products using security features


of OpenSSL the following shall apply:
This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(www.openssl.org).
This product includes cryptographic software written
by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

For more information, please contact Order No. IC1000-K4000-A101-A4-7600


our Customer Support Center. Printed in Germany
Phone: +49 180 524 84 37 Dispo 06200, SIMC-0000-44559
Fax: +49 180 524 24 71 KG 10.14 0.8 184 EN
(Charges depending on the provider) HL 14089304 HHGlobal
E-mail: support.energy@siemens.com Printed on elementary chlorine-free bleached paper.

También podría gustarte